US20050250946A1 - Method for the synthesis of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides - Google Patents

Method for the synthesis of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20050250946A1
US20050250946A1 US11/182,862 US18286205A US2005250946A1 US 20050250946 A1 US20050250946 A1 US 20050250946A1 US 18286205 A US18286205 A US 18286205A US 2005250946 A1 US2005250946 A1 US 2005250946A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
formula
compound
dideoxy
didehydro
solvent
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/182,862
Inventor
Pasquale Confalone
Fuqiang Jin
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Gilead Pharmasset LLC
Original Assignee
Pharmasset Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Pharmasset Inc filed Critical Pharmasset Inc
Priority to US11/182,862 priority Critical patent/US20050250946A1/en
Publication of US20050250946A1 publication Critical patent/US20050250946A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04—Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C07H19/06—Pyrimidine radicals
    • C07H19/067—Pyrimidine radicals with ribosyl as the saccharide radical
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04—Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C07H19/06—Pyrimidine radicals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/10—Antimycotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18—Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02—Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04—Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C07H19/16—Purine radicals

Definitions

  • This invention is a novel process for the synthesis of ⁇ -D and ⁇ -L-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-nucleosides (“D4” nucleosides), and in particular ⁇ -D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine ( ⁇ -D-D4FC), useful as antiviral agents and chemotherapeutics.
  • D4 ⁇ -D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine
  • HIV human immunodeficiency virus
  • HIV human immunodeficiency virus
  • HIV the retrovirus that causes progressive destruction of the human immune system with the resultant onset of AIDS.
  • Effective treatment through inhibition of HIV reverse transcriptase is known for both nucleoside based inhibitors and non-nucleoside based inhibitors.
  • Nucleoside based HIV inhibitors in the treatment of AIDS In 1985, it was reported that the synthetic nucleoside 3′-azido-3′-deoxythymidine (AZT) inhibits the replication of human immunodeficiency virus.
  • a number of compounds are effective in the treatment of the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) which is the retrovirus that causes progressive destruction of the human immune system with the resultant onset of AIDS.
  • HIV reverse transcriptase is known for both nucleoside based inhibitors and non-nucleoside based inhibitors.
  • Nucleoside based HIV inhibitors in the treatment of AIDS In 1985, it was reported that the synthetic nucleoside 3′-azido-3′
  • FTC cis-2-hydroxymethyl-5-(5-fluorocytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane
  • Schinazi, et al. “Selective Inhibition of Human Immunodeficiency viruses by Racemates and Enantiomers of cis-5-Fluoro-1-[2-(Hydroxymethyl)-1,3-Oxathiolane-5-yl]Cytosine” Antimicrobial Agents and Chemo - therapy , November. 1992, page 2423-2431. See also U.S. Pat. No. 5,210,085; U.S. Pat. No. 5,204,466, WO 91/11186, and WO 92/14743.
  • D4T 2′,3′-Dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-thymidine
  • D4 nucleosides that have been tested include 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-cytidine (“D4C”), 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-uridine (“D4U”), 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-adenosine (“D4A”), 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-inosine (“D4I”), and 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-guanosine (“D4G”).
  • D4C 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-cytidine
  • D4U 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-uridine
  • D4U 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-adenosine
  • D4A 2′,
  • ⁇ -D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine or ⁇ -D-D4FC having the structure exhibits potent anti-HIV activity in vitro and demonstrates no cross-resistance with all approved anti-HIV agents. See Schinazi et al., J. Med. Chem. 1999, 42,859-867.
  • 5,703,058 discloses a method for the treatment of HIV and HBV infection that includes administering an effective amount of ⁇ -L-D4FC in combination or alternation with cis-2-hydroxymethyl-5-(5-fluorocytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane, cis-2-hydroxymethyl-5-(cytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane, 9-[4-(hydroxy-methyl)-2-cyclopenten-1-yl)-guanine (carbovir), 9-[(2-hydroxyethoxy)methyl]guanine (acyclovir), interferon, 3′-deoxy-3′-azido-thymidine (AZT), 2′,3′-dideoxyinosine (DDI), 2′,3′-dideoxycytidine (DDC), ( ⁇ )-2′-fluoro-5-methyl- ⁇ -L-ara-uridine (L-FMAU) or 2′,′3′-didehydro-2′
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,905,070 discloses a method for the treatment of HIV and HBV infection that includes administering an effective amount of ⁇ -D-D4FC in combination or alternation with cis-2-hydroxymethyl-5-(5-fluorocytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane, cis-2-hydroxymethyl-5-(cytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane, 9-[4-(hydroxymethyl)-2-cyclopenten-1-yl)-guanine (carbovir), 9-[(2-hydroxyethoxy)methyl]guanine (acyclovir), interferon, 3′-deoxy-3′-azido-thymidine (AZT), 2′,3′-dideoxyinosine (DDI), 2′,3′-dideoxycytidine (DDC), ( ⁇ )-2′-fluoro-5-methyl- ⁇ -L-ara-uridine (L-FMAU) or 2′,3′-
  • European Patent Application Publication No. 0 409 227 A2 filed by Ajinomoto Co., Inc. discloses ⁇ -D-D4FC (Example 2) and its use to treat hepatitis B. Netherlands Patent No. 8901258 filed by Stichting Rega V. Z. W. discloses generally 5-halogeno-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrocytidine derivatives for use in treating HIV and hepatitis B (“HBV”).
  • ⁇ -D-D4FC ⁇ -D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine
  • natural and unnatural D4 nucleosides can serve as synthetic intermediates for the preparation of a large variety of other nucleoside analogs, including but not limited to 2′,3′-dideoxy, and 2′ or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analogs as well as additional derivatives obtained by subsequent functional group manipulations.
  • 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides it is desirable to have a facile, efficient and general route of synthesis of these compounds.
  • D4T 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-thymidine
  • the first reported method to produce D4T involved the base promoted elimination of 3′-O-sulfonyl esters of 2′-deoxynucleosides.
  • This synthetic route is limited to pyrimidine nucleosides and cannot be used in the production of purine nucleosides. Horwitz, J. P., et a., J. Org. Chem. 1966, 31, 205; Horwitz, J. P., et al., J. Org. Chem. 1967, 32, 817; and Horwitz, J. P., et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1964, 86, 1896.
  • MMPP magnesium monoperoxyphthalate
  • R is t-butyldiphenylsilyl
  • STIPP is 2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl.
  • PCT WO 99/43691 describes 2′-fluoro-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′ehydronucleosides that are useful in the treatment of viral infections.
  • Schemes 9, 10, and 11 of the PCT describe methods for the preparation of ⁇ -L-2′-fluoro-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-nucleosides.
  • the PCT publication states that previously, the synthesis of 2′,3′-unsaturated L-nucleosides had been accomplished via an elimination reaction starting from readily available nucleoside analogs, which involved a lengthy modification procedure.
  • the 2′-fluoro-2′,3′-unsaturated sugar which bears enhanced stability of the glycosyl bond during the condensation with a heterocycle, is more suitable for the direct coupling reaction.
  • B is a purine or pyrimidine base and R is an oxygen protecting group
  • (R)-2′-fluorobutenolide prepared from L-glyceraldehyde acetonide was used as the key precursor in the preparation of 2′-fluoro-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides.
  • the mixture was carried on to the cyclization reaction under acidic conditions to give the desired lactone and uncyclized diol.
  • the resulting mixture was converted to the silyl lactone and was subjected to reduction with DIBA1-H in CH 2 Cl 2 at 78° C. to give the lactol.
  • the lactol was treated with acetic anhydride to yield a key acetate intermediate, which was condensed with silylated 6-chloropurine under Vorbruggen conditions to afford anomeric mixtures of the protected nucleoside.
  • Treatment of the protected nucleoside with TBAF in THF gave a mixture of free nucleosides that could be separated by silica gel column chromatography.
  • the adenine analogs are obtained by the treatment of 6-chloropuridine with mercapto-ethanol and NaOMe in a steel bomb at 90° C. Further treatment of the adenine analogs under the same conditions afforded the inosine analogs.
  • the present invention is an efficient synthetic route to 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides from available precursors with the option of introducing functionality as needed.
  • the present invention provides an efficient commercial process of high yields, can be conducted on a gram, multigram, kilogram, or multikiligram scale, and yields stable intermediates.
  • the invention further provides for a nonchromato-graphic separation to improve overall yield.
  • D4 compounds made according to the present invention can also be used as synthetic intermediates in the preparation of a variety of other nucleoside analogs, including but not limited to 2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analogs as well as additional derivatives obtained by subsequent functional group manipulations.
  • the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of ⁇ -D and ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides starting from appropriately substituted ribonucleosides in two, optionally three steps: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; and optionally, Step (3) a deprotection.
  • the haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.
  • the method for preparing ⁇ -D- and ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides comprising:
  • the nucleoside of structure (3) is optionally further derivatized, for example by base modification or sugar modification by methods known in the art; and then optionally deprotecting the nucleoside if necessary.
  • the ⁇ -D or ⁇ P-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be converted into a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside bearing a different nucleobase.
  • a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorouridine can be derivatized to form a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorocytidine.
  • a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-uridine can be further derivatized to form a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-cytidine.
  • the ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be reduced to form a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analog.
  • hydrogen reduction can be effected in ethanol with 10% palladium on carbon.
  • the D4 nucleoside can be modified to form a 2′, a 3 ′ or a 5′-substituted-nucleoside or a combination thereof, also using known chemistry to those skilled in the art.
  • Townsend, et al. Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Volume 1, Plenum Press: New York, teaches oxidation of 2′3′-dideoxy-2′3′-didehydro-nucleosides with osmium tetraoxide yields a ribonucleoside.
  • the present invention provides for a novel, short, and high yield three step ⁇ -D-D4FC synthesis that produces few undesired side-products.
  • the synthesis of the present invention does not require protection of the 5-fluorocytosine, purification by chromatography or use of toxic metals.
  • the process of the present invention is feasible to run on a gram, kilogram or multi-kilogram commercial scale.
  • the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of ⁇ -D-D4FC starting from 5-fluorocytidine in two, optionally three steps: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; and optionally, Step (3) a deprotection.
  • the haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.
  • the method of the present invention does not require protection of the primary amine group of the cytidine.
  • the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of ⁇ -D-D4FC starting from 5-fluorouridine: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; Step (3-a,b) a cytidine formation; and Step (3-c) a deprotection.
  • the haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.
  • Step (1) is optionally carried forward into Step (2) as a solution in a suitable aprotic solvent.
  • the product(s) of Step (2) is optionally carried forward into Step (3) as a solution in a suitable solvent.
  • the conditions used in Step (3), a catalytic amount of base in a suitable solvent allow for a simple isolation of the final product ⁇ -D-D4FC.
  • the use of a catalytic amount of the base facilitates isolation of the product since the base can be soluble in the suitable solvent used for Step (3).
  • the product ⁇ -D-D4FC precipitates and/or crystallizes out of the solution upon removal of the suitable solvent.
  • a second (re)crystallization can be performed to improve the purity of ⁇ -D-D4FC.
  • Step (1) is optionally carried forward into Step (2) as a solution in a suitable aprotic solvent.
  • the product(s) of Step (2) and (3-a,b) are optionally carried forward into Step (3-c) as a solution in a suitable solvent.
  • the conditions used in Step (3-c), a catalytic amount of base in a suitable solvent allow for a simple isolation of the final product ⁇ -D-D4FC.
  • the use of a catalytic amount of the base facilitates isolation of the product since the base can be soluble in the suitable solvent used for Step (3-c).
  • the product ⁇ -D-D4FC precipitates and/or crystallizes out of the solution upon removal of the suitable solvent.
  • a second (re)crystallization can be performed to improve the purity of ⁇ -D-D4FC.
  • the present invention is an efficient synthetic route to 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides from available precursors with the option of introducing functionality as needed.
  • the present invention provides an efficient commercial process of high yields, can be conducted on a gram, multigram, kilogram, or multikiligram scale, and yields stable intermediates.
  • the invention further provides for a nonchromato-graphic separation to improve overall yield.
  • D4 compounds made according to the present invention can also be used as synthetic intermediates in the preparation of a variety of other nucleoside analogs, including but not limited to 2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analogs as well as additional derivatives obtained by subsequent functional group manipulations.
  • the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of ⁇ -D and ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides starting from appropriately substituted ribonucleosides in two, optionally three steps: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; and optionally, Step (3) a deprotection.
  • the haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.
  • the method for preparing ⁇ -D- and ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides comprising:
  • the nucleoside of structure (3) is optionally further derivatized, for example by base modification or sugar modification by methods known in the art; and then optionally deprotecting the nucleoside if necessary.
  • the ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be converted into a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside bearing a different nucleobase.
  • a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorouridine can be derivatized to form a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorocytidine.
  • a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-uridine can be further derivatized to form a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-cytidine.
  • the ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be reduced to form a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analog.
  • hydrogen reduction can be effected in ethanol with 10% palladium on carbon.
  • the D4 nucleoside can be modified to form a 2′, a 3′ or a 5′-substituted-nucleoside or a combination thereof, also using known chemistry to those skilled in the art.
  • Townsend, et al. Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Volume 1, Plenum Press: New York, teaches oxidation of 2′3′-dideoxy-2′3′-didehydro-nucleosides with osmium tetraoxide yields a ribonucleoside.
  • Further functionalities can be introduced via the 2′ or 3′ hydroxyls using the teachings of Kuzuhara, H., et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,144,018 (1992) by activating and substituting the relevant hydroxyl.
  • the present invention provides for a novel, short, and high yield three step ⁇ -D-D4FC synthesis that produces few undesired side-products.
  • the synthesis of the present invention does not require protection of the 5-fluorocytosine, purification by chromatography or use of toxic metals.
  • the process of the present invention is feasible to run on a gram, kilogram or multi-kilogram commercial scale.
  • the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of ⁇ -D-D4FC starting from 5-fluorocytidine in two, optionally three steps: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; and optionally, Step (3) a deprotection.
  • the haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.
  • the method of the present invention does not require protection of the primary amine group of the cytidine.
  • the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of ⁇ -D-D4FC starting from 5-fluorouridine: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; Step (3-a,b) a cytidine formation; and Step (3-c) a deprotection.
  • the haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.
  • Step (1) is optionally carried forward into Step (2) as a solution in a suitable aprotic solvent.
  • the product(s) of Step (2) is optionally carried forward into Step (3) as a solution in a suitable solvent.
  • the conditions used in Step (3), a catalytic amount of base in a suitable solvent allow for a simple isolation of the final product ⁇ -D-D4FC.
  • the use of a catalytic amount of the base facilitates isolation of the product since the base can be soluble in the suitable solvent used for Step (3).
  • the product ⁇ -D-D4FC precipitates and/or crystallizes out of the solution upon removal of the suitable solvent.
  • a second (re)crystallization can be performed to improve the purity of ⁇ -D-D4FC.
  • Step (1) is optionally carried forward into Step (2) as a solution in a suitable aprotic solvent.
  • the product(s) of Step (2) and (3-a,b) are optionally carried forward into Step (3-c) as a solution in a suitable solvent.
  • the conditions used in Step (3-c), a catalytic amount of base in a suitable solvent allow for a simple isolation of the final product ⁇ -D-D4FC.
  • the use of a catalytic amount of the base facilitates isolation of the product since the base can be soluble in the suitable solvent used for Step (3-c).
  • the product ⁇ -D-D4FC precipitates and/or crystallizes out of the solution upon removal of the suitable solvent.
  • a second (re)crystallization can be performed to improve the purity of ⁇ -D-D4FC.
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III): wherein:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III) wherein:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III-a): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III-a): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (II) or (II*): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
  • the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (II-a) or (II*-a), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (III): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
  • the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (III-a), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV), wherein:
  • step (1) the acyl halide of Formula Q-C( ⁇ O)X comprises:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III): wherein:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III) wherein:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III-a): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III-a): comprising:
  • the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (VI) or (VI*): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
  • the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (VI-a) or (VI*-a): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (VII): or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
  • the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (VII-a), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
  • the present invention is useful for the preparation of ⁇ -D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine which is useful as an agent for inhibiting the growth or replication of HIV.
  • the process of the present invention is also useful for the preparation of ⁇ -D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine which is useful as human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) reverse transcriptase inhibitor.
  • HIV reverse transcriptase inhibitor is useful for the inhibition of HIV in an ex vivo sample containing HIV or expected to be exposed to HIV.
  • HIV reverse transcriptase inhibitor can be used to inhibit HIV present in a body fluid sample (for example, a body fluid or semen sample) which contains or is suspected to contain or be exposed to HIV.
  • HIV reverse transcriptase inhibitor is also useful as standards or reference compounds for use in tests or assays for determining the ability of an agent to inhibit viral replication and/or HIV reverse transcriptase, for example in a pharmaceutical research program.
  • HIV reverse transcriptase inhibitor can be used as a control or reference compound in such assays and as a quality control standard.
  • Compounds of the present invention have at least two chiral centers, and can exist in and be isolated in optically active and racemic forms. Some compounds can exhibit polymorphism.
  • the present invention encompasses racemic, optically-active, polymorphic, chiral, diastereomeric or stereoisomeric form, or mixtures thereof, of a compound of the invention, which possess the useful properties described herein. It will be appreciated that certain compounds of the present invention contain an asymmetrically substituted carbon atom, and can be isolated in optically active or racemic forms.
  • optically active forms can be prepared by, for example, resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase or by enzymatic resolution. All chiral, diastereomeric, racemic forms and all geometric isomeric forms of a structure are intended, unless the specific stereochemistry or isomer form is specifically indicated.
  • Optically active forms of the compounds can be prepared using any method known in the art, including by resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase.
  • Examples of methods to obtain optically active materials include at least the following.
  • Chiral chromatography including simulated moving bed chromatography, is used in one embodiment.
  • a wide variety of chiral stationary phases are commercially available.
  • the term “substantially free of,” “substantially in the absence of” or “isolated” refers to a nucleoside composition that includes at least 95%, and preferably 99% to 100% by weight, of the designated enantiomer of that nucleoside. In a preferred embodiment, the process produces compounds that are substantially free of enantiomers of the opposite configuration.
  • alkyl refers to a saturated straight, branched, or cyclic, primary, secondary, or tertiary hydrocarbon, for example, of C 1 to C 10 , and specifically includes methyl, trifluoromethyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, pentyl, cyclopentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexylmethyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, and 2,3-dimethylbutyl.
  • the term includes both substituted and unsubstituted alkyl groups.
  • Moieties with which the alkyl group can be substituted are selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, sulfate, phosphonic acid, phosphate, or phosphonate, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for example, as taught in Greene, et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis , John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, hereby incorporated by reference.
  • lower alkyl refers to a C 1 to C 4 saturated straight, branched, or if appropriate, a cyclic (for example, cyclopropyl) alkyl group, including both substituted and unsubstituted forms. Unless otherwise specifically stated in this application, when alkyl is a suitable moiety, lower alkyl is preferred. Similarly, when alkyl or lower alkyl is a suitable moiety, unsubstituted alkyl or lower alkyl is preferred.
  • aryl refers to phenyl, biphenyl, or naphthyl.
  • the term includes both substituted and unsubstituted moieties.
  • the aryl group can be substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo, hydroxyl, amino, alkylamino, arylarnino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, sulfate, phosphonic acid, phosphate, or phosphonate, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for example, as taught in Greene, et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis , John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • alkyl refers to an aryl group as defined above linked to the molecule through an alkyl group as defined above.
  • alkaryl or “alkylaryl” as used herein, and unless otherwise specified, refers to an alkyl group as defined above linked to the molecule through an aryl group as defined above.
  • the alkyl group can be optionally substituted as describe above and the aryl group can be optionally substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, acyl, acyloxy, amino, amido, azido, carboxyl derivatives, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, thiol, imine, sulfonyl, sulfanyl, sulfinyl, sulfamonyl, ester, carboxylic acid, amide, phosphonyl, phosphinyl, phosphoryl, phosphine, thioester, thioether, acid halide, anhydride, oxime, hydrozine, carbamate, phosphonic acid, phosphonate, or any other viable functional group
  • aryl phenyl; naphthyl; phenylmethyl; phenylethyl; 3,4,5-trihydroxyphenyl; 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl; 3,4,5-triethoxy-phenyl; 4-chlorophenyl; 4-methylphenyl; 3,5-di-tertiarybutyl-4-hydroxyphenyl; 4-fluorophenyl; 4-chloro-1-naphthyl; 2-methyl-1-naphthylmethyl; 2-naphthylmethyl; 4-chlorophenylmethyl; 4-t-butylphenyl; 4-t-butylphenylmethyl and the like.
  • alkaryl or alkylaryl refers to an alkyl group with an aryl substituent.
  • aralkyl or arylalkyl refers to an aryl group with an alkyl substituent.
  • alkylamino or “arylamino” refers to an amino group that has one or two alkyl or aryl substituents, respectively.
  • alkyl primary amine is intended to have the meaning well known to one skilled in the art of organic chemistry.
  • Examples of C 3 -C 6 alkyl primary amine are propylamine, butylamine, pentylamine, and hexylamine, including both branched and straight-chain alkyl groups.
  • halo as used herein, includes bromo, chloro, fluoro, and iodo.
  • heteroatom refers to oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, and phosphorus.
  • acyl refers to a carboxylic acid ester in which the non-carbonyl moiety of the ester group is selected from straight, branched, or cyclic alkyl or lower alkyl, alkoxyalkyl including methoxymethyl, aralkyl including benzyl, aryloxyalkyl such as phenoxymethyl, aryl including phenyl optionally substituted with halogen, C 1 to C 4 alkyl or C 1 to C 4 alkoxy, sulfonate esters such as alkyl or aralkyl sulphonyl including methanesulfonyl, the mono, di or triphosphate ester, trityl or monomethoxytrityl, substituted benzyl, trialkylsilyl (e.g.
  • esters dimethyl-t-butylsilyl or diphenylmethylsilyl.
  • Aryl groups in the esters optimally comprise a phenyl group.
  • lower acyl refers to an acyl group in which the non-carbonyl moiety is lower alkyl.
  • protected refers to a group that is added to an oxygen, nitrogen, or phosphorus atom to prevent its further reaction or for other purposes.
  • oxygen and nitrogen protecting groups are known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
  • substituted means that one or more hydrogen on the designated atom is replaced with a selection from the indicated group, provided that the designated atom's normal valency is not exceeded, and that the substitution results in a stable compound.
  • purine or pyrimidine base includes, but is not limited to, adenine, N 6 -alkyl-purines, N 6 -acylpurines (wherein acyl is C(O)(alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl), N 6 -benzylpurine, N 6 -halopurine, N 6 -vinylpurine, N 6 -acetylenic purine, N 6 -acyl purine, N 6 -hydroxyalkyl purine, N 6 -thioalkyl purine, N 2 -alkylpurines, N 2 -alkyl-6-thiopurines, thymine, cytosine, 5-fluoro-cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, 6-azapyrimidine, including 6-aza-cytosine, 2- and/or 4-mercapto-pyrmidine, uracil, 5-halouracil, including 5-fluorouracil, C 5 -alkylpyrimidines,
  • Purine bases include, but are not limited to, guanine, adenine, hypoxanthine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 2-(Br, Fl, Cl or I)-purine optionally with a substituent including an amino or carbonyl group in the 6-position, and 6-(Br, Cl, or I)-purine optionally with a substituent including an amino or carbonyl group in the 2-position.
  • Functional oxygen and nitrogen groups on the base can be protected as necessary or desired.
  • Suitable protecting groups are well known to those skilled in the art, and include trimethylsilyl, dimethylhexylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl, trityl, alkyl groups, and acyl groups such as acetyl and propionyl, methanesulfonyl, and p-toluenesulfonyl.
  • purine and pyrimidine bases can be substituted with alkyl groups or aromatic rings, bonded through single or double bonds or fused to the heterocycle ring system.
  • the purine base and pyrimidine bases can be bound to the sugar moiety through any available atom, including the ring nitrogen and ring carbon (producing a C-nucleoside).
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug is used throughout the specification to describe any pharmaceutically acceptable form (such as an ester, phosphate ester, salt of an ester or a related group) of a compound which, upon administration to a patient, provides the active compound.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and acids. Suitable salts include those derived from alkali metals such as potassium and sodium, alkaline earth metals such as calcium and magnesium, among numerous other acids well known in the pharmaceutical art.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs refer to a compound that is metabolized, for example hydrolyzed or oxidized, in the host to form the compound of the present invention.
  • prodrugs include compounds that have biologically labile protecting groups on a functional moiety of the active compound.
  • Prodrugs include compounds that can be oxidized, reduced, aminated, deaminated, hydroxylated, dehydroxylated, hydrolyzed, dehydrolyzed, alkylated, dealkylated, acylated, deacylated, phosphorylated, dephosphorylated to produce the active compound.
  • compositions include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and acids.
  • Suitable salts include those derived from alkali metals such as potassium and sodium, alkaline earth metals such as calcium and magnesium, among numerous other acids well known in the pharmaceutical art.
  • examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are organic acid addition salts formed with acids, which form a physiological acceptable anion, for example, tosylate, methanesulfonate, acetate, citrate, malonate, tartarate, succinate, benzoate, ascorbate, ⁇ -ketoglutarate, and ⁇ -glycerophosphate.
  • Suitable inorganic salts can also be formed, including, sulfate, nitrate, bicarbonate, and carbonate salts.
  • salts can be obtained using standard procedures well known in the art, for example by reacting a sufficiently basic compound such as an amine with a suitable acid affording a physiologically acceptable anion.
  • a sufficiently basic compound such as an amine
  • a suitable acid affording a physiologically acceptable anion.
  • Alkali metal (for example, sodium, potassium or lithium) or alkaline earth metal (for example calcium) salts of carboxylic acids can also be made.
  • nucleosides described herein can be administered as a nucvolide prodrug to increase the activity, bioavailability, stability or otherwise alter the properties of the nucleoside.
  • a number of nucleotide prodrug ligands are known.
  • alkylation, acylation or other lipophilic modification of the mono, di or triphosphate of the nucleoside will increase the stability of the nucleotide.
  • substituent groups that can replace one or more hydrogens on the phosphate moiety are alkyl, aryl, steroids, carbohydrates, including sugars, 1,2-diacylglycerol and alcohols. Many are described in R. Jones and N. Bischofberger, Antiviral Research, 27 (1995) 1-17. Any of these can be used in combination with the disclosed nucleosides to achieve a desired effect.
  • the active nucleoside can also be provided as a 5′-phosphoether lipid or a 5′-ether lipid, as disclosed in the following references, which are incorporated by reference herein: Kucera, L. S., N. Iyer, E. Leake, A. Raben, Modest E. K., D. L. W., and C. Piantadosi. 1990. “Novel membrane-interactive ether lipid analogs that inhibit infectious HIV-1 production and induce defective virus formation.” AIDS Res. Hum. Retro Viruses. 6:491-501; Piantadosi, C., J. Marasco C. J., S. L. Morris-Natschke, K. L. Meyer, F. Gumus, J. R. Surles, K. S.
  • Nonlimiting examples of U.S. patents that disclose suitable lipophilic substituents that can be covalently incorporated into the nucleoside, preferably at the 5′-OH position of the nucleoside or lipophilic preparations include U.S. Pat. No. 5,149,794 (Sep. 22, 1992, Yatvin et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,194,654 (Mar. 16, 1993, Hostetler et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,263 (Jun. 29, 1993, Hostetler et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,256,641 (Oct. 26, 1993, Yalvin et al.); U.S. Pat. No.
  • lipophilic substituents that can be attached to the nucleosides of the present invention, or lipophilic preparations, include WO 89/02733, W0 90/00555, W0 91/16920, W0 91/18914, W0 93/00910, W0 94/26273, W0 96/15132, EP 0 350 287, EP 93917054.4, and W0 91/19721.
  • Multigram scale is preferably the scale wherein at least one starting material is present in 10 grams or more, more preferably at least 50 grams or more, even more preferably at least 100 grams or more.
  • Multikilogram scale is intended to mean the scale wherein more than one kilogram of at least one starting material is used.
  • Industrial scale as used herein is intended to mean a scale which is other than a laboratory scale and which is sufficient to supply product sufficient for either clinical tests or distribution to consumers.
  • suitable solvents which can be readily selected by one of skill in the art of organic synthesis, said suitable solvents generally being any solvent which is substantially nonreactive with the starting materials (reactants), the intermediates, or products at the temperatures at which the reactions are carried out, i.e., temperatures which can range from the solvent's freezing temperature to the solvent's boiling temperature.
  • a given reaction can be carried out in one solvent or in a combination of two of more solvents.
  • suitable solvents for a particular reaction step can be selected by one skilled in the art.
  • Suitable ether solvents can include, by way of example and without limitation, tetrahydrofuran, diethyl ether, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, ethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, triethylene glycol dimethyl ether, or t-butyl methyl ether.
  • Suitable ester solvents can include, by way of example and without limitation, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, n-propyl acetate, i-propyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, i-butyl acetate, t-butyl acetate, n-amyl acetate, i-amyl acetate, sec-amyl acetate, t-amyl acetate, 2,2-dimethylpropyl acetate, 2-methylbutyl acetate, methyl propionate, n-butyl propionate, ethyl butyrate, i-propyl butyrate, methyl isobutyrate, ethyl isobutyrate, i-butyl isobutyrate, methyl valerate, ethyl valerate, methyl isovalerate, ethyl isovalerate, methyl pivalate, or ethyl pival
  • Suitable polar aprotic solvents can include, by way of example and without limitation, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, DMPU, DMI, NMP, formamide, N-methylacetamide, N-methyl-formamide, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, propionitrile, ethyl formate, methyl acetate, hexachloroacetone, acetone, ethyl meihyl ketone, ethyl acetate, sulfolane, N,N-dimethylpropionamide, tetramethylurea, nitromethane, nitrobenzene, or hexamethylphosphoramide.
  • Suitable polar solvents can include, by way of example and without limitation, suitable polar aprotic solvents, water, methanol, ethanol, 2-nitroethanol, 2-fluoroethanol, 2,2,2-trifluoroethanol, ethylene glycol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 2-methoxyethanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, i-butyl alcohol, t-butyl alcohol, 2-ethoxyethanol, diethylene glycol, 1-, 2-, or 3-pentanol, neo-pentyl alcohol, t-pentyl alcohol, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, cyclohexanol, benzyl alcohol, phenol, or glycerol.
  • suitable polar aprotic solvents water, methanol, ethanol, 2-nitroethanol, 2-fluoroethanol, 2,2,2-trifluoroethanol, ethylene glycol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 2-meth
  • Suitable halogenated solvents include, but are not limited to carbon tetrachloride, bromodichloromethane, dibromochloromethane, bromoform, chloroform, bromochloro-methane, dibromomethane, butyl chloride, dichloromethane, tetrachloroethylene, trichloroethylene, 1,1,1-trichloroethane, 1,1,2-trichloroethane, 1,1-dichloroethane, 2-chloropropane, hexafluorobenzene, 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, chloro-benzene, fluorobenzene, fluorotrichloromethane, chlorotrifluoromethane, bromotrifluoro-methane, carbon tetrafluoride, dichlorofluoromethane, chlorodifluoromethane, trifluoro-methane, 1,2-
  • suitable reducing agent refers to any agent which reacts with 3′-O-acyl-2′-halo-2′-deoxycytidine and/or 2′-O-acyl-3′-halo-3′-deoxycytidine, wherein —O-acyl is —O—C( ⁇ O)CH 2 R 1 as defined herein, to remove the —O-acyl- and halo groups and form a 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxycytidine of Formula.
  • reducing agents include, but are not limited to, Zn or Fe metals, or activated metals such as Zn—Cu.
  • suitable acid catalyst refers to any acidic agent such as a mineral acid or an organic acid such as a carboxylic acid, alkylsulfonic acid, or arylsulfonic acid, which catalyzes the reductive elimination of a 3-O-acyl-2′-halo-2′-deoxycytidine or 2-O-acyl-3′-halo-3′-deoxycytidine in the presence of a reducing agent to form a 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydronucleoside.
  • mineral acids include, but are not limited to hydroiodic acid, hydrobromic acid, hydrochloric acid, and sulfuric acid.
  • organic acids include, but are not limited to methanesulfonic acid, p-toluene-sulfonic acid, trifluoromethane sulfonic acid, formic acid, acetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, benzoic acid, and caproic acid.
  • suitable base refers to any agent acting as a base which cleaves the 5′-O-acyl group of a compound of Formula (III) to form a free 5′-hydroxy group of a compound of Formula (IV).
  • suitable bases include, but are not limited to, sodium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, lithium methoxide, lithium ethoxide, potassium methoxide, potassium ethoxide, ammonium hydroxide, ammonium C 1 -C 6 alkoxide, C 3 -C 6 alkyl primary amine, and basic resin.
  • C 3 -C 6 alkyl primary amine examples include, but are not limited to, propyl amine, butyl amine, and pentyl amine.
  • “basic resin” examples include, but are not limited to, Dowex® 1X2-200 ion-exchange resin, Dowex® 1X2-400 ion-exchange resin, and Dowex® 1X4-50 ion-exchange resin. Dowex® is a registered trademark of Dow Chemical Company.
  • ammonium alkoxide refers to a solution of ammonia dissolved in alcohol.
  • ammonium C 1 -C 6 alkoxide include, but are not limited to, ammonium methoxide (NH 3 in methanol), ammonium ethoxide (NH 3 in ethanol), ammonium propoxide (NH 3 in proanol), and ammonium butoxide (NH 3 in butanol).
  • amine base refers to any nitrogen-containing compound which facilitates the formation of compound (VIII) from the 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrouridine compound (VII).
  • amine bases include, but are not limited to, tertiary amines such as triethylamine, tributylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N,N-diisopropyl-ethylamine, tetramethylethylenediamine, N,N-dimethylcyclohexylamine, N,N-diethylcyclohexyl amine, N,N-dimethyloctylamine, 1,4-diazabi-cyclo-[2.2.2]-octane, 1,8-diazabicyclo-[5.4.0]-undec-7-ene, 1,5-diazabicyclo-[4.3.0]-non-5-ene, and nitrogen-containing aromatic compounds such as pyridine and N,
  • activating agent refers to any agent that enables the conversion of the 5-fluoro-uridine ring of (VII) into a 5-fluoro-cytidine ring by converting the oxo group in the 4-position of the uridine ring into a suitable leaving group “LG”, which in turn is displaced by an aminating agent to form the 5-fluoro-cytidine ring.
  • an activating agent in addition to agents known to one skilled in the art, include, but are not limited to, aryl sulfonyl halides, alkyl sulfonyl halides, and 1,2,4-triazole in the presence of a phosphorus chloride.
  • aryl sulfonyl halide or “alkyl sulfonyl halide” refers to an aryl or alkyl substituted sulfonyl containing compound which reacts with the oxo of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrouridine compound (VII), in the presence of an amine base, to form a compound of Formula (VIII) wherein “LG” is an alkylsulfonyloxy or an arylsulfonyloxy group.
  • Examples of an aryl sulfonyl halide or alkyl sulfonyl halide include, but are not limited to, methanesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethyl sulfonyl chloride, ethanesulfonyl chloride, benzenesulfonyl chloride, and p-toluene-sulfonyl chloride.
  • phosphorus chloride refers to a phosphorus containing compound which, in the presence of an amine base, and 1,2,4-triazole form a compound of Formula (VIII) wherein the leaving group “LG” is the triazolyl group.
  • a phosphorus chloride compound include, but are not limited to, phosphorus oxychloride and diphenyl chlorophosphate.
  • the leaving group or “LG” is dependent on which activating agent is used in the process. For example when methanesulfonyl chloride is the activating agent, then methanesulfonyloxy becomes the leaving group.
  • the leaving group disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, methanesulfonyloxy, trifluoro-methane-sulfonyloxy, ethanesulfonyloxy, benzenesulfonyloxy, p-toluenesulfonyloxy, and 1,2,4-triazolyl.
  • aminoating agent refers to any nitrogen-containing compound which reacts with compound (VIII) to form a cytidine (IV).
  • suitable aminating agents include, but are not limited to NH 3 , ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium carbonate.
  • the key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted ⁇ -D- or ⁇ -L-nucleoside (1) wherein B is a pyrimidine or purine base, including but not limited to, 5-fluorocytosine, 5-fluorburacil, cytosine, uracil, thymine, adenine, guanine, or inosine, and even more. preferably 5-fluorocytosine or 5-fluorouracil; and Y is O, S or CH 2 .
  • the ⁇ -D- or ⁇ -L-nucleoside can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard sugar modifications and/or coupling techniques. In one embodiment, the ⁇ -D- or ⁇ -L-nucleoside is purchased.
  • the activation of the ⁇ -D- or ⁇ -L-nucleoside (1) can be achieved using a with an acyl halide of the formula X—C( ⁇ O)R 1 , X—C( ⁇ O)C(R 1 ) 2 OC( ⁇ O)R 1 or X—C( ⁇ O)phenylC( ⁇ O)OR 1 ; wherein X is a halogen (F, Cl, Br or I), and each R 1 is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkyl, aryl or phenyl, in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to form the haloacylated product (2) wherein R′ is R 1 , —C(R 1 ) 2 OC( ⁇ O)R 1 or -phenylC( ⁇ O)OR 1 ; and at least one R is halogen (F, Cl, Br or I), and at least one R is an acyl of the formula —OC( ⁇ O)R 1 .
  • This reaction can be accomplished at any temperature that allows the reaction to proceed at an acceptable rate without promoting decomposition or excessive side products.
  • the preferred temperature is from about 0° C. to 85° C. and even more preferably from about 35° C. to 60° C.
  • Appropriate solvents include any polar aprotic solvent including, but not limiting to, alkyl solvents such as hexane and cyclohexane, benzene, toluene, acetone, ethyl acetate, dithianes, THF, dioxane, acetonitrile, dichloromethane, dichloroethane, diethyl ether, pyridine, dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), dimethylacetamide, or any combination thereof, though preferably acetonitrile.
  • alkyl solvents such as hexane and cyclohexane, benzene, toluene, acetone, ethyl acetate, dithianes, THF, dioxane, acetonitrile, dichloromethane, dichloroethane, diethyl ether, pyridine, dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethyl
  • the reduction of the haloacylated product (2) can be achieved using any suitable reducing agent, optionally with an acid catalyst, in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to form the 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside of structure (3).
  • Suitable reducing agents include any reagent that can reductively dehalogenate the haloacylated product (2) to form a 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-nucleoside of structure (3).
  • reducing agents include, but are not limited to zinc or iron metals, or activated metals such as Zn—Cu.
  • Suitable acid catalysts include, but are not limited to, acetic acid, propionic acid, trifluoroacetic acid and hydrochloric acid, though most preferably acetic acid.
  • This reaction can be accomplished at any temperature that allows the reaction to proceed at an acceptable rate without promoting decomposition or excessive side products.
  • the preferred temperature is from about 20° C. to 40° C. and even more preferably from about 25° C. to 35° C.
  • Appropriate solvents include any polar protic or aprotic solvent including, but not limiting to, alcohols,. such as methanol, ethanol and isopropanol, acetone, ethyl acetate, dithianes, THF, dioxane, acetonitrile, dichloromethane, dichloroethane, diethyl ether, pyridine, dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), dimethylacetamide, or any combination thereof, preferably a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate.
  • alcohols such as methanol, ethanol and isopropanol, acetone, ethyl acetate, dithianes, THF, dioxane, acetonitrile, dichloromethane, dichloroethane, diethyl ether, pyridine, dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), dimethylacetamide,
  • the nucleoside of structure (3) is optionally further derivatized, for example by base modification or sugar modification by methods known in the art; and then optionally deprotecting the nucleoside if necessary.
  • the ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be converted into a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside bearing a different nucleobase.
  • a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorouridine can be derivatized to form a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorocytidine.
  • a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-uridine can be further derivatized to form a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-cytidine.
  • the ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be reduced to form a ⁇ -D or ⁇ -L-2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analog.
  • hydrogen reduction can be effected in ethanol with 10% palladium on carbon.
  • the D4 nucleoside can be modified to form a 2′, a 3′ or a 5′-substituted-nucleoside or a combination thereof, also using known chemistry to those skilled in the art.
  • Townsend, et al. Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Volurne 1, Plenum Press: New York, teaches oxidation of 2′3′-dideoxy-2′3′-didehydro-nucleosides with osmium tetraoxide yields a ribonucleoside.
  • Scheme 1 provides the general synthetic method for the synthesis of compounds of formulae (II) through (IV) wherein Q is 2-(R 1 CH 2 C( ⁇ O)O)phen-1-yl-, R 1 CH 2 —, or R 1 CH 2 C( ⁇ O)OC(R 2 ) 2 —; X is Cl, Br or I; R 1 is H or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; R 2 is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, or propyl; R 3 is Cl, Br or I; and R 4 is R 1 CH 2 C( ⁇ O)O—.
  • haloacylation refers to a reaction of an acyl halide QC( ⁇ O)X with a cytidine (I) to form 3′-O-acyl-2′-halo-2′-deoxycytidine (II*) and/or 2′-O-acyl-3′-halo-3′-deoxycytidine (II), wherein —O-acyl is —O—C(O)CH 2 R 1 .
  • An example is a bromoacetylation of fluorocytidine (I) with (AcO)(Me) 2 C—C(O)Br to form a 3′-O-acetyl-2′-bromo-2′-deoxycytidine (II*-a) and 2′-O-acetyl-3′-bromo-3′-deoxycytidine (II-a).
  • Step (1) is conducted by reacting a cytidine of Formula (I) with an acyl halide of Formula Q(C ⁇ O)X in one or more suitable aprotic solvent(s) to form a compound of Formula (II), a compound of (II*), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (II) and (II*).
  • a cytidine of Formula (I) is charged to a reaction vessel followed by addition of a suitable polar aprotic solvent(s).
  • a suitable acyl halide of Formula Q(C ⁇ O)X such as 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, is then charged to the vessel.
  • reaction After reaction is complete, the temperature of reaction is cooled to a range of about ⁇ 10 to about 25° C. Then the reaction is quenched by the addition of an aqueous base solution, such as aqueous alkaline hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate solution.
  • an aqueous base solution such as aqueous alkaline hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate solution.
  • the pH of the reaction mixture should be closely monitored during quenching, so that the pH is between 7 to 11 upon completion of addition of the aqueous base solution.
  • intermediates (II) and/or (II*) are extracted into an organic solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon solvent or an ester solvent.
  • the preferred organic solvent for extracting intermediates (II) and/or (II*) is an ester solvent.
  • intermediates (II) and/or (II*) can be carried forward as a solution stream into the next step without isolation as a solid.
  • reaction time ranges from about 4 to about 48 hours.
  • Suitable polar aprotic solvents include alkylnitriles, esters, halogenated hydrocarbons, ethers, dialkylformamides, or a combination of two or more suitable polar aprotic solvents.
  • Preferred suitable polar aprotic solvents for step (1) include, but are not limited to, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate and methylene chloride. More preferred is a combination of two or more polar aprotic solvents, preferably ethyl acetate and acetonitrile.
  • a preferred ratio of ethyl acetate to acetonitrile for step (1) is between 20:1 to 1:1.
  • a more preferred ratio of ethyl acetate to acetonitrile is between 10:1 to 2:1.
  • a most preferred ratio is 4:1 (EtOAc:CH 3 CN).
  • Suitable acyl halides include, but are not limited to, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl chloride, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl iodide, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxopropoxy)-propanoyl chloride, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxopropoxy)-propanoyl bromide, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxopropoxy)-propanoyl iodide, 2-chloro-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-bromo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-iodo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-chloro-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester pentanoic acid, 2-bromo-1
  • More preferred suitable acyl halides include, but are not limited to, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl bromide, or 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl bromide.
  • a most preferred suitable acyl halide is 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide.
  • a preferred amount of the suitable acyl halide is about 2.0 to about 8.0 equivalents based on one mole of the starting material 5-fluorocytidine.
  • a more preferred amount of acyl halide for step (1) is about 3.0 to about 5.0 equivalents.
  • acyl halide it is preferred to add the suitable acyl halide to the reaction vessel in about 0.5 hours to about 4 hours.
  • a more preferred addition time of acyl halide for step (1) is about 0.5 to about 3 hours, and a most preferred addition time is about 1 hour.
  • a suitable temperature range for the addition of a suitable acyl halide of Step (1) is about 0° C. to about 60° C.
  • a preferred suitable temperature range for the addition of a suitable acyl halide of step (1) is about 10° C. to about 40° C., and most preferred suitable temperature range is about 25° C. to about 40° C.
  • a preferred aqueous base solution is an aqueous solution of NaOH, potassium carbonate or potassium bicarbonate.
  • a preferred pH range for the reaction is from about 7.5 to about 10 upon completion of addition of the aqueous base.
  • a most preferred pH range is in the range of about 8 to about 9.
  • reaction time of step (1) is determined as dependent on temperature, acyl halide, and suitable polar aprotic solvent. Generally, under the preferred conditions, the reaction time is from about 15 to about 24 hours.
  • Sample preparation dissolve 25 mg of sample (dry solids weight) into a suitable solvent; adjust concentration to approximately 1 mg/ml. The sample concentration can be adjusted to ensure the proper quantitation.
  • Step (2) Reductive Dehalogenation.
  • This step comprises adding a suitable reducing agent to intermediates (II) and/or (II*) from step (1) in one or more. suitable polar solvent(s), optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III).
  • a suitable reducing agent such as Zn—Cu activated metal is then added to the vessel.
  • Conditions which can facilitate the reductive elimination include the addition of an acid catalyst, such as a mineral acid or an organic acid.
  • an acid catalyst is charged to a well-agitated mixture of the solution of compounds (II) and/or (II*) and the reducing agent over a period of about 0.5 h to about 1 hour.
  • the reaction is monitored by HPLC (see HPLC condition in Step (1)) and is considered complete when the starting material peak for (II) and/or (II*) is ⁇ 5% by area. Depending on the reducing agent used and the temperature of the reaction, completion can be reached in about 0.2 h to about 48 hours. Under the preferred conditions, the reaction is complete in about 4 to about 12 hours.
  • the reducing agent for example Zn—Cu activated metal, which can be in excess, is then removed by filtration, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure.
  • the crude product (III) is then dissolved in an ester solvent such as ethyl acetate or isopropyl acetate.
  • a metal complexing reagent is added to the crude product solution.
  • the metal complexing reagent forms a solid with the metal salts which can be removed by filtration.
  • the filtrate containing compound (III) is then washed with an aqueous solution such as aqueous ammonium and aqueous EDTA.
  • the compound 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrocytidine (III) can be obtained by removing the solvent.
  • the residue is then dissolve in an alcohol solvent to form a solution which is used in Step (3).
  • a preferred alcohol solvent is methanol or ethanol.
  • a most preferred alcohol solvent is methanol.
  • Suitable polar solvents for step (2) are dialkyl-formamide, dialkylacetamide, alcohol, alkylnitrile, ether, ester, or a combination of two or more of the suitable polar solvents.
  • Preferred suitable polar solvents are DMF, methanol, ethanol, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1′,4-dioxane, ethyl acetate, or a combination of two or more of the suitable polar solvents.
  • a most preferred solvent is one consisting of ethyl acetate and methanol.
  • Preferred ratio of ethyl acetate to methanol for step (2) is between 4:1 to 1:1. Most preferred ratio is from 4:1 to 2:1.
  • Reducing agents include, but are limited to, metals such as Zn or Fe, or activated metals such as Zn—Cu couple.
  • Preferred suitable reducing agents for step (2) are Zn and Zn—Cu couple.
  • a most preferred suitable reducing agent is Zn—Cu couple.
  • Zn—Cu couple When Zn—Cu couple is used, the molar ratio of Zn and Cu can be between 99:1 to 1:1. Preferred molar ratio is between 99:1 to 10:1. Most preferred ratio is between 99:1 to 25:1.
  • the preferred amount of a reducing agent is from 1.2 to 20 equivalents. Most preferred amount is from 1.5 to 3.0 equivalents.
  • Preferred suitable acid catalysts for step (2) include, but are not limited to, acetic acid, propionic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, and hydrochloric acid.
  • a most preferred suitable acid is acetic acid.
  • a preferred amount of suitable acid catalyst for step (2) is 0.05 to 2.0 equivalents per mole of compounds (II) and/or (II*).
  • a most preferred amount of suitable acid catalyst is from 0.05 to 0.5 equivalents.
  • a preferred temperature for step (2) is from about 20 to about 40° C.
  • a most preferred temperature is from 25 to 35° C.
  • Suitable metal complexing reagents include potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, and sodium sulfide.
  • the preferred metal completing reagent is potassium carbonate.
  • This step comprises adding a Suitable base to 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside (III) in a suitable solvent to form a compound of Formula (IV).
  • compound (III) is charged to the reaction vessel in a suitable solvent followed by addition of a suitable base at 20 to 50° C.
  • the reaction is monitored by HPLC (see HPLC condition in Step (1)), and is considered complete when the starting material peak for (III) reaches ⁇ 5% by area.
  • the reaction is usually complete in about 1 hour to about 48 hours. Using the preferred conditions, the reaction is usually complete in about 4 to about 18 hours.
  • Solvents for step (3) include alcohols, aqueous alcohols, or aqueous ethers.
  • Preferred solvents for step (3) include, but are not limited to, methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, aqueous methyl alcohol, aqueous. ethyl alcohol, aqueous THF, methyl alcohol-THF, or a combination of two or more of the above solvents.
  • a most preferred solvent is methyl alcohol.
  • Compound (IV) can be obtained by removing the solvent followed by crystallization using an alcohol solvent such as methanol or ethanol. Alternatively, and more preferably, compound (IV) is obtained by precipitation/or crystallization upon partial removal of solvent. The crude product, compound (IV), obtained by a filtration, is then (re)crystallized in an alcohol solvent such as methanol or ethanol.
  • Suitable bases for the deprotection in step (3) include alkaline hydroxides, alkaline carbonates, alkaline alkoxides, basic resin, ammonium hydroxide, ammonium C 1 -C 6 alkoxide, and C 3 -C 6 alkyl primary amines.
  • a preferred suitable base for step (3) includes, but is not limited to, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, ammonium hydroxide, ammonium methoxide, ammonium ethoxide, and ammonium propoxide. Most preferred bases are sodium methoxide, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium methoxide.
  • a preferred amount of base is from 0.02 to 20 equivalents of a compound of Formula (III). A more preferred amount is from 0.05 to 1.2 equivalents. A most preferred amount is 0.05 equivalents.
  • a most preferred reaction temperature is from about 25 to about 35° C.
  • reaction time of step (1) is determined as dependent on temperature, suitable base, and solvent. Generally, under the preferred conditions, the reaction time is from 4 to 18 hours.
  • Scheme 3 provides the general synthetic method for the synthesis of compounds of formulae (II) through (IV) wherein Q is 2-R 1 CH 2 C( ⁇ O)O-phen-1-yl-, R 1 CH 2 —, or R 1 CH 2 C( ⁇ O)OC(R 2 ) 2 —; X is Cl, Br, or I; R 1 is H or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; R 2 is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, or propyl; R 3 is Cl, Br, or I; and R 4 is R 1 CH 2 C( ⁇ O)O—.
  • haloacylation refers to a reaction of an acyl halide QC( ⁇ O)X with a uridine (V) to form 3′-O-acyl-2′-halo-2′-deoxyuridine (VI*) and/or 2′-O-acyl-3′-halo-3′-deoxyuridine (VI), wherein —O-acyl is —O—C(O)CH 2 R 1 .
  • Step (1) is conducted by reacting a uridine of Formula (V) with an acyl halide of Formula QC( ⁇ O)X in one or more suitable aprotic solvent(s) to form a compound of Formula (VI), a compound of (VI*), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*).
  • a uridine of Formula (V) is charged to a reaction vessel followed by addition of a suitable polar aprotic solvent(s).
  • a suitable acyl halide of Formula QC( ⁇ O)X such as 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, is then charged to the vessel. After reaction is complete, the temperature of reaction is cooled to a range of about ⁇ 10 to about 25° C.
  • reaction is quenched by the addition of an aqueous base solution, such as aqueous alkaline hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate solution.
  • aqueous base solution such as aqueous alkaline hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate solution.
  • the pH of the reaction mixture should be closely monitored during quenching, so that the pH is between 7 to 11 upon completion of addition of the aqueous base solution.
  • intermediates (VI) andior (VI*) are extracted into an organic solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon solvent or an ester solvent.
  • the preferred organic solvent for extracting intermediates (VI) and/or (VI*) is an ester solvent.
  • reaction time ranges from about 4 to about 48 hours.
  • Suitable polar aprotic solvents include alkylnitriles, esters, halogenated hydrocarbons, ethers, dialkylformamides, or a combination of two or more suitable polar aprotic solvents.
  • Preferred suitable polar aprotic solvents for step (1) include acetonitrile and methylene chloride. Most preferred solvent is acetonitrile.
  • Suitable acyl halides include, but are not limited to, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl chloride, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl iodide, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxopropoxy)-propanoyl chloride, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxo-propoxy)-propanoyl bromide, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxopropoxy)-propanoyl iodide, 2-chloro-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-bromo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-iodo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-chloro-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester pentanoic acid, 2-bromo
  • More preferred acyl halides include, but are not limited to, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl bromide, or 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl bromide.
  • a most preferred acyl halide is 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide.
  • a preferred amount of the acyl halide is about 2.0 to about 8.0 equivalents based on one mole of the starting material 5-fluorouridine.
  • a more preferred amount of acyl halide for step (1) is about 3.0 to about 5.0 equivalents.
  • acyl halide it is preferred to add the acyl halide to the reaction vessel in about 0.5 hours to about 4 hours.
  • a more preferred addition time of acyl halide for step (1) is about 0.5 to about 3 hours, and a most preferred addition time is about 1 hour.
  • a suitable temperature range for the addition of an acyl halide of Step (1) is about 0° C. to about 60° C.
  • a preferred temperature range for the addition of an acyl halide of step (1) is about 10° C. to about 85° C., and most preferred temperature range is about 35° C. to about 60° C.
  • a preferred aqueous base solution is an aqueous solution of NaOH, potassium carbonate or potassium bicarbonate.
  • a preferred pH range for the reaction is from about 7.5 to about 10 upon completion of addition of the aqueous base.
  • a most preferred pH range is in the range of about 8 to about 9.
  • reaction time of step (1) is determined as dependent on temperature, acyl halide, and suitable polar aprotic solvent. Generally, under the preferred conditions, the reaction time is from about 15 to about 24 hours.
  • Step (2) Reductive Dehalogenation.
  • This step comprises adding a reducing agent to intermediates (VI) and/or (VI*) from step (1) in one or more suitable polar solvent(s), optionally in the presence of an acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (VII).
  • a reducing agent such as Zn—Cu activated metal
  • an acid catalyst is charged to a well-agitated mixture of the solution of. compounds (VI) and/or (VI*) and the reducing agent over a period of about 0.5 h to about 1 hour.
  • the reaction is monitored by HPLC (see HPLC condition in Step (1)) and is considered complete when the starting material peak for (VI) and/or (VI*) is ⁇ 5% by area. Depending on the reducing agent used and the temperature of the reaction, completion can be reached in about 0.2 h to about 48 hours. Under the preferred conditions, the reaction is complete in about 4 to about 12 hours.
  • the reducing agent for example Zn—Cu activated metal, which can be in excess, is then removed by filtration, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure.
  • the crude product (VII) is then dissolved in an ester solvent such as ethyl acetate or isopropyl acetate.
  • a metal complexing reagent is added to the crude product solution.
  • the metal complexing reagent forms a solid with the metal salts which can be removed by filtration.
  • the filtrate containing compound (VII) is then washed with an aqueous solution such as aqueous ammonium and aqueous EDTA.
  • the compound 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrouridine (VII) can be obtained by removing the solvent.
  • Suitable polar solvents for step (2) are dialkyl-formamide, dialkylacetamide, alcohol, alkylnitrile, ether, ester, or a combination of two or more of the suitable polar solvents.
  • Preferred suitable polar solvents are DMF, methanol, ethanol, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, ethyl acetate, or a combination of two or more of the suitable polar solvents.
  • a most preferred solvent is one consisting of ethyl acetate and methanol.
  • Preferred ratio of ethyl acetate to methanol for step (2) is between 4:1 to 1:1. Most preferred ratio is from 4:1 to 2:1.
  • Reducing agents include, but are limited to, metals such as Zn or Fe, or activated metals such as Zn—Cu couple.
  • Preferred reducing agents for step (2) are Zn and Zn—Cu couple.
  • a most preferred reducing agent is Zn—Cu couple.
  • Zn—Cu couple When Zn—Cu couple is used, the molar ratio of Zn and Cu can be between 99:1 to 1:1. Preferred molar ratio is between 99:1 to 10:1. Most preferred ratio is between 99:1 to 25:1.
  • the preferred amount of a reducing agent is from 1.2 to 20 equivalents. Most preferred amount is from 1.5 to 3.0 equivalents.
  • Preferred acid catalysts for step (2) include, but are not limited to, acetic acid, propionic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, and hydrochloric acid.
  • a most preferred acid is acetic acid.
  • a preferred amount of acid catalyst for step (2) is 0.05 to 2.0 equivalents per mole of compounds (VI) and/or (VI*).
  • a most preferred amount of acid catalyst is from 0.05 to 0.5 equivalents.
  • a preferred room temperature for step (2) is from about 20 to about 40° C.
  • a most preferred temperature is from 25 to 35° C.
  • Suitable metal complexing reagents include potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, and sodium sulfide.
  • the preferred metal complexing reagent is potassium carbonate.
  • Step (3-a) the oxo group at the 4-position of the 5-fluoro-uridine moiety of compound (VII) is first converted to a suitable leaving group, Step (3-a), followed by an aminolysis reaction, Step (3-b), to form a 5-fluorocytidine (III).
  • Step (3-a) This step comprises adding intermediate (VII) from Step (2) to a suitable activating agent in the presence of a suitable amine base in a suitable solvent to form a compound of Formula (VIII).
  • a suitable activating agent is prepared in a reaction vessel in a suitable solvent in the presence of an amine base. It is understood that part of the preparation can include workup of the solution, for example filtration, before addition of Compound (VII).
  • Compound (VII) is added to the vessel and the reaction is aged for a sufficient amount of time to form an intermediate of formula (VIII). The reaction is carried forward into Step (3-b).
  • Suitable solvents for Step (3-a) include, but are not limited to, halogenated hydrocarbons, ethers or nitriles, wherein nitriles are preferred, of which acetonitrile is most preferred.
  • Suitable amine bases for Step (3-a) are tertiary amines, examples of which include, triethylamine, tributylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N,N-diisopropyl-ethylamine, N,N-dimethylcyclohexylamine, N,N-diethylcyclohexylamine, N,N-dimethyloctylamine, tetramethylethylenediamine, pyridine, N,N-dimethyl-aminopyridine, 1,4-diazabicyclo-[2.2.2]-octane, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene, and 1,5-diazabicyclo-[4.3.0]-non-5-ene.
  • tertiary amines examples of which include, triethylamine, tributylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N,N-diisopropyl-ethy
  • a more preferred amine base is a trialkylamine, wherein triethylamine is preferred.
  • Suitable activating agents for Step (3-a) are arylsulfonyl chlorides, alkylsulfonyl chlorides and 1,2,4-triazole with phosphorus chlorides; wherein 1,2,4-triazole with phosphorus chlorides are preferred.
  • Phosphorus chloride includes phosphorus oxychloride, diaryl chlorophosphates and dialkyl chlorophosphates.
  • a preferred phosphorus chloride is phosphorus oxychloride or diaryl chlorophosphate.
  • a most preferred phosphorus chloride is phosphorus oxychloride or diphenyl chlorophosphate.
  • Step (3-a) a vessel is charged with 1,2,4-triazole in a suitable solvent, and a suitable amine base is added followed by addition of a phosphorus chloride.
  • Preferred temperatures are from ⁇ 40 to 40° C.; most preferred temperatures are from ⁇ 10 to 5° C.
  • the mixture is agitated at room temperature preferably for 15 minutes to 4 hours, most preferably for 0.50 to 1 hours, after which the reaction is filtered.
  • compound (VII) is added to the filtrate and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature.
  • reaction time ranges from 1 to 48 hours.
  • a preferred amount of a phosphorus chloride is 2 to 8 equivalents based on one mole of compound (VII).
  • a more preferred amount of a phosphorus chloride is 3.0 to 5.0 equivalents.
  • the amounts of 1,2,4-triazole and the base depend on the amount of the phosphorus chloride and the number of chloride in the phosphorus chloride (n).
  • Preferred amounts of 1,2,4-triazole and the base are 1.0 to n to 1.2 to n equivalents based on one mole of the phosphorus chloride.
  • Most preferred amounts of 1,2,4-triazole and the base are 1.0 to n to 1.05 to n equivalents.
  • Step (3-b) This step comprises adding an aminating agent to the solution from Step (3-a) to form a compound of Formula (III).
  • Preferred aminating agents are sources of ammonia, such as, ammonia gas, ammonium hydroxide and ammonium salt such as ammonium carbonate; wherein ammonia gas and ammonium hydroxide are more preferred.
  • Ammonia from a suitable ammonia source is then directly introduced into the above solution at a temperature from 0 to 40° C., preferably from 10 to 25° C.
  • a preferred amount of ammonia is 2.0 to 30.0 equivalents based on one mole of the starting material. Most preferred amount of ammonia is 2.0 to 10.0 equivalents.
  • the reaction time ranges from 30 minutes to 24 hours.
  • the product is obtained by removing the solvent followed by chromatography or recrystalization in solvents such as esters, ethers, hydrocarbons, halogenated hydrocarbons; preferably in esters; most preferably in ethyl acetate.
  • solvents such as esters, ethers, hydrocarbons, halogenated hydrocarbons; preferably in esters; most preferably in ethyl acetate.
  • This step comprises adding a suitable base to 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside (III) in a suitable solvent to form a compound of Formula (III).
  • compound (III) is charged to the reaction vessel in a suitable solvent followed by addition of a suitable base at 20 to 50° C.
  • the reaction is monitored by HPLC (see HPLC condition in Step (1)), and is considered complete when the starting material peak for (III) reaches ⁇ 5% by area.
  • the reaction is usually complete in about 1 hour to about 48 hours. Using the preferred conditions, the reaction is usually complete in about 4 to about 18 hours.
  • Solvents for step (3-c) include alcohols, aqueous alcohols, or aqueous ethers.
  • Preferred solvents for step (3-c) include, but are not limited to, methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, aqueous methyl alcohol, aqueous ethyl alcohol, aqueous THF, methyl alcohol-THF, or a combination of two or more of the above solvents.
  • a most preferred solvent is methyl alcohol.
  • Compound (III) can be obtained by removing the solvent followed by crystallization using an alcohol solvent such as methanol or ethanol. Alternatively, and more preferably, compound (III) is obtained by precipitation/or crystallization upon partial removal of solvent. The crude product, compound (III), obtained by a filtration, is then (re)crystallized in an alcohol solvent such as methanol or ethanol.
  • Suitable bases for the deprotection in step (3-c) include alkaline hydroxides, alkaline carbonates, alkaline alkoxides, basic resin, ammonium hydroxide, ammonium C 1 -C 6 alkoxide, and C 3 -C 6 alkyl primary amines.
  • a preferred suitable base for step (3-c) includes, but is not limited to, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, ammonium hydroxide, ammonium methoxide, ammonium ethoxide, and ammonium propoxide. Most preferred bases are sodium methoxide, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium methoxide..
  • a preferred amount of base is from 0.02 to 20 equivalents of a compound of Formula (III). A more preferred amount is from 0.05 to 1.2 equivalents. A most preferred amount is 0.05 equivalents.
  • a most preferred reaction temperature is from about 25° C. to about 35° C.
  • step (3-c) it is understood that one skilled in the art can determine the preferred reaction time of step (3-c) as dependent on temperature, suitable base, and solvent. Generally, under the preferred conditions, the reaction time is from 4 to 18 hours.
  • Sample preparation dissolve 25 mg of sample (dry solids weight) into a suitable solvent; adjust concentration to approximately 1 mg/ml. The sample concentration can be adjusted to ensure the proper quantitation.
  • Mass spectra were measured on a Micromass Inc. Autospec High Resolution double focussing sector (EBE) MS spectrometers. Infrared spectra were recorded on a Nicolet 510 FT-IR spectrometer. Elemental analyses were performed by Atlantic Microlab, Inc., Norcross, Ga. All reactions were monitored using thin layer chromatography on Analtech, 200 mm silica gel GF plates. Dry 1,2-dichloroethane, dichloromethane, acetonitrile and THF were obtained by drying over 4A molecular sieves.
  • EBE High Resolution double focussing sector
  • Step (1) To a suspension of 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 26.1 g, 0.1 mole) in EtOAc (200 mL) and CH 3 CN (50 mL) was added 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide (84.4 g, 0.4 mol) dropwise at room temperature under N 2 . The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 24 hours. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. An aqueous KHCO 3 solution ( ⁇ 10%) was added until the mixture reached a pH of about 8.0. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted one time with ethyl acetate. The combined organic solution was washed with brine. Concentration afforded the major products,(II-a) and (II*-a), and the minor products, (II-b) and (II*-b), as a solid in a ratio of 12.6:1 (43.6 g, 88%).
  • Step (1) To a suspension of 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 5.2 g, 0.02 mole) in CH 3 CN (40 mL) was added 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide (16.7 g, 0.08 mol) dropwise at room temperature under N 3 . The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (80 mL) and then cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. An aqueous KHCO 3 solution ( ⁇ 10%) was added until the mixture reached a pH of about 8.0. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted two times with ethyl acetate.
  • Step (1) To a suspension of 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 2.61 g, 0.01 mole) and Et 4 NBr (6.3 g, 0.03 mol)in CH 2 CH 2 (20 mL) was added 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide dropwise (9.3 g, 0.03 mol) at room temperature under N 2 . The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. An aqueous KHCO 3 solution ( ⁇ 10%) was added until the mixture reached a pH of about 8.0. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted one time with CH 2 Cl 2 . The combined organic solution was washed with brine.
  • Step (1) To a suspension of 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 2.61 g, 0.01 mole) and Et 4 NBr (6.3 g, 0.03 mol) in EtOAc (20 mL) was added ⁇ -acetoxy-isobutyryl bromide dropwise (6.3 g, 0.03 mol) at 50° C. under N 2 . The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at 50° C. for 22 hours. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. An aqueous KHCO 3 solution ( ⁇ 10%) was added until the mixture reached a pH of about 8.0. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted one time with ethyl acetate.
  • Step (1) To a suspension of 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 2.61 g, 0.01 mole) in CH 3 CN (20 mL) was added 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide (8.4 g, 0.04 mol) dropwise at 50° C. under N 2 . The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at 50° C. for 6 hours. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (40 mL) and then cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. An aqueous KHCO 3 solution ( ⁇ 10%) was added until the mixture reached a pH of about 8.0. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted two times with ethyl acetate.
  • Step (1) A 50 L reactor was purged with N 2 for 10 minutes. To this reactor was charged 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 1.40 kg, 5.36 mole), EtOAc (10.8 L), and CH 3 CN (2.66 l) to form a slurry. The slurry was cooled to 20° C., and under vigorous agitation, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide (4.51 kg, 21.44 mol) was added over 1 h so that the temperature did not exceed 35° C. After addition, the resulting reaction mixture was agitated at room temperature for 20 hours. HPLC showed the conversion was over 99%. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C.
  • Step (2) Under N 2 (g) atmosphere, the mixture of products from Step (1), Example 1, (43.6 g, 0.088 mol) was dissolved in a mixed solvent of ethyl acetate (300 mL) and MeOH (100 mL). The Zn—Cu couple reducing agent, prepared as described below, was added. Acetic acid (2.4 mL, 0.044 mol) was introduced dropwise under vigorous agitation. The resulting reaction mixture was agitated for additional 7 hours at room temperature. The excess Zn—Cu couple was removed by filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in 300 mL of EtOAc.
  • Zn—Cu couple reducing agent Zinc powder (14.3 g, 0.22 mol) and water (100 mL) were charged to a reaction vessel under N 2 . A solution of CuSO 4 .H 4 O (2.84 g, 0.012 mol) in 10 niL of water was added slowly. After addition, the mixture was stirred for additional 0.25 hours at room temperature. The Zn—Cu couple was collected by filtration followed by washing with water and MeOH. The wet cake was used immediately as described above.
  • Step (2) The mixture of products of step (1) (8.9 g, 0.018 mol) was dissolved in DMF solvent (100 mL) under N 2 .
  • the Zn—Cu couple (6 g, 0.09 mol), prepared in the way as described in Example 7, was added.
  • Acetic acid (0.8 mL, 0.015 mol) was introduced dropwise under vigorous agitation.
  • the resulting reaction mixture was agitated for 3 hours at room temperature.
  • the excess Zn—Cu couple was removed by filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • the residue was dissolved in 100 mL of EtOAc. To this EtOAc solution was added a K 2 CO 3 (4.5 g, 0.033 mol) solution in 5 mL of water.
  • the white solid was removed by filtration.
  • Step (2) The mixture of products of Step (1)(2.79 g, 0.0056 mol) was dissolved in a mixed solvent of ethyl acetate (21 mL) and MeOH (7 mL).
  • the Zn—Cu couple reducing agent (1.8 g, 0.028 mol), prepared in the way as described in example 7, was added under N 2 .
  • Acetic acid (0.31 mL, 0.0056 mol) was introduced dropwise under vigorous agitation.
  • the resulting reaction mixture was agitated for an additional 5 hours at room temperature.
  • the excess Zn—Cu couple was removed by filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in 30 mL of EtOAc.
  • Step (2) Freshly prepared Zn—Cu couple was charged to a 50 L reactor that was purged with N 2 . See below for preparation of Zn—Cu couple.
  • AcOH (0.14 L, 2.8 mol) was added to the vessel over 25 minutes under vigorous agitation. The temperature rose slowly to 31° C. After addition of AcOH, the mixture was agitated at room temperature until HPLC analysis showed the disappearance of the starting materials ( ⁇ 3 h).
  • the excess Zn—Cu was removed by filtration through a bed of Celite and the cake was washed with 3.85 L MeOH.
  • Step (3) Products (III-a) and (III-b) of Example 7, (24.5 g, 0.069 mol), were dissolved in 200 mL of MeOH. To this solution was introduced a 25 wt % NaOMe solution (0.8 mL, 0.003 mol). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure to half of the original volume. The white solid was collected by filtration (13.0 g, 83%). The HPLC retention time for (IV-a) is 8.3 minutes.
  • Step (3) Products (III-a) and (III-b) (2.85 g, 0.008 mol) were dissolved in an ammonia-saturated MeOH solution (25 mL, ⁇ 36% Wt. NH 3 in MeOH) the resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was slurried with 10 mL of MeOH. The white solid was collected by filtration (1.37 g, 75%).
  • Step (3) Products (III-a) and (III-b) (4.8 g, 0.013 mol), were dissolved 50 mL of MeOH. To this solution was added Dowex® OH ion-exchange resin (4.8 g) prepared as described below. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. The Dowex® OH ion-exchange resin was filtered off and washed completely with MeOH. The MeOH solution was then concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of ⁇ 20 mL. The white solid was collected by filtration (1.65 g, 54%).
  • Dowex® 1X2-200 ion-exchange resin (20 g) was suspended in 20 mL of 50% wt NaOH solution and the suspension was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The resin was collected by filtration and then washed with MeOH.
  • Step (3) To a 50 L reactor were charged a solution of the products (III-a) and (III-b) in MeOH from Step 2, Example 10 (24 L, 7.08 mol) and 25 wt % MeONa in MeOH (110 mL, 0.48 mol). The solution was agitated at room temperature for 12 hours, and then concentrated under reduced pressure at a temperature of ⁇ 30° C. to a volume of 12 L. The resulting product slurry was cooled to 0° C. to 5° C. and stirred for 2 hours. The product was then collected by filtration (1.46 Kg, 91%).
  • Step (1) To a suspension of 5-fluorouridine ((I), 0.5 g, 1.91 mmol) in CH 3 CN (40 mL) was added ⁇ -acetoxyisobutyryl bromide (1.6 g, 7.64 mmol) dropwise at room temperature under N 2 . The resulting reaction mixture was then heated to reflux for 1 hour. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. Saturated NaHCO 3 solution (40 mL) was added. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL ⁇ 3) and the EtOAc solution was washed with brine and then dried over Na 2 SO 4 .
  • Step (1) To a suspension of 5-fluorouridine ((V), 1.31 g, 5.0 mmol) and tetraethylammonium bromide (1.05 g, 5.0 mmol) in CH 3 CN (15 mL) was added ⁇ -acetoxyisobutyryl bromide (2.9 mL, 20 mmol) dropwise at room temperature under N 2 . The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 4 days. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. Saturated NaHCO 3 solution was added until the pH of the mixture was ⁇ 8.0.
  • Step (1) To a suspension of 5-fluorouridine ((V), 1.31 g, 5.0 mmol) and tetraethylammonium bromide (1.05 G, 5.0 mmol) in CH 3 CN (15 mL) was added ⁇ -acetoxyisobutyryl bromide (2.9 mL, 20 mmol) dropwise at room temperature under N 2 . The resulting reaction mixture was then heated at 45° C. overnight. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. Saturated NaHCO 3 solution was added until the pH of the mixture was ⁇ 8.0.
  • Step (1) To a suspension of 5-fluorouridine ((V), 1.31 g, 5.0 mrnol) in CH 3 CN (15 mL) was added ⁇ -acetoxyisobutyryl bromide (2.9 mL, 20 mmol) dropwise at room temperature under N 2 . The resulting reaction mixture was then heated at 45° C. overnight. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. Saturated NaHCO 3 solution was added until the pH of the mixture was ⁇ 8.0. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL ⁇ 3) and the EtOAc solution was washed with brine and then dried over Na 2 SO 4 . Concentration afforded the major products (VI-a) and (VI*-a) and the minor products, (VI-b) and (VI*-b) as an amorphous solid in a ratio of 2.4:1 (2.4 g, 99%).
  • Step (1) To a suspension of 5-fluorouridine ((V), 0.67 g, 2.5 mmol) in CH 3 CN (4 mL) and EtOAc (4 mL) was added ⁇ -acetoxyisobutyryl bromide (1.5 mL, 10 mmol) dropwise at room temperature under N 2 . The resulting reaction mixture was then heated at 45° C. overnight. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. Saturated NaHCO 3 solution was added until the pH of the mixture was ⁇ 8.0. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL ⁇ 3) and the EtOAc solution was washed with brine and then dried over Na 2 SO 4 . Concentration afforded a mixture of (VI-a), (VI*-a) and (VI-b), (VI -b) as an amorphous solid in a ratio of 1:1 (1.2 g, 97%).
  • Step (2) Under a N 2 (g) atmosphere, the mixture of products from Step (1), Example 1, (2.5 g, 5.0 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (150 mL). Zn (10 g, 154 mmol) was added. Acetic acid (2.5 mL, 45 mmol) was introduced dropwise under vigorous agitation. The resulting reaction mixture was agitated for 2 hours at room temperature. The excess Zn was removed by filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in 50 mL of EtOAc and, washed with 10 M NH 4 OH and brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 . Concentration afforded the product as an amorphous solid (1.34 g, 76%).
  • Step (2) Under a N 2 (g) atmosphere, the mixture of products from Step (1), Example 1, (2.5 g, 5.0 mmol) was dissolved in EtOAc (30 mL) and MeOH (10 mL). Zn (0.8 g, 12.5 mmol) was added. Acetic acid (0.14 mL, 2.5 mmol) was introduced dropwise under vigorous agitation. The resulting reaction rnixture was agitated for 5 hours at room temperature. The excess Zn was removed by filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in 50 mL of EtOAc and washed with 10 M NH 4 OH and brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 . Concentration afforded the product as an amorphous solid (1.53 g, 87%).
  • Step (3-a) POCl 3 (0.43 mL, 4.62 mmol) was added to a solution of 1,2,4-triazole (1.06 g, 18.7 mmol) and TEA (2.1 mL, 18.7 mmol) in CH 3 CN (15 mL) at 0° C. After addition, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hrs. The solid was filtered off and the filtrate mixed with compounds (VII-a) and (VII-b) from Step 2, Example 6 (500 mg, 1.4 mmol). The solution was stirred at room temperature for 4 hrs, and then cooled in ice-water bath.
  • Step (3-c) Compounds (III-b) and (III-a) (24.5 g, 0.069 mol), were dissolved in 200 mL of MeOH. To this solution was introduced a 25 wt % NaOMe solution (0.8 mL, 0.003 mol). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure to half of the original volume.
  • Step (3-c) Products (III-b) and (III-a) (2.85 g, 0.008 mol), were dissolved in an ammonia-saturated MeOH solution (25 mL, ⁇ 36% Wt. NH 3 in MeOH) the resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was slurried with 10 mL of MeOH. The white solid was collected by filtration (1.37 g, 75%).
  • Step (3-c) Products (III-b) and (III-a) (4.8 g, 0.013 mol), were dissolved 50 mL of MeOH. To this solution was added Dowex-OH resin (4.8 g), whose preparation was described below. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. The Dowex resin was filtered off and washed completely with MeOH. The MeOH solution was then concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of ⁇ 20 mL. The white solid was collected by filtration (1.65 g, 54%).

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • AIDS & HIV (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
  • Saccharide Compounds (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention is an efficient synthetic route to 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides from available precursors with the option of introducing functionality as needed, such as, the 2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analogs as well as additional derivatives obtained by subsequent functional group manipulations. Briefly, the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of β-D and β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides starting from appropriately substituted ribonucleosides in two, optionally three steps: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; and optionally, Step (3) a deprotection. The haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.

Description

    FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • This invention is a novel process for the synthesis of β-D and β-L-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-nucleosides (“D4” nucleosides), and in particular β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine (β-D-D4FC), useful as antiviral agents and chemotherapeutics.
  • This application claims priority to U.S. provisional application Nos. 60/272,434 and 60/272,441, both filed on Mar. 1, 2001.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • In 1981, acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS) was identified as a disease that severely compromises the human immune system. In 1983, the etiological cause of AIDS was determined to be the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV). Reverse transcription is a common feature of retrovirus replication. Viral replication requires a virally encoded reverse transcriptase to generate DNA. copies. of viral sequences by reverse transcription of the viral RNA genome. Reverse transcriptase, therefore, is a clinically relevant target for the chemotherapy of retroviral infections because the inhibition of virally encoded reverse transcriptase would interrupt viral replication.
  • A number of compounds are effective in the treatment of the human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) which is the retrovirus that causes progressive destruction of the human immune system with the resultant onset of AIDS. Effective treatment through inhibition of HIV reverse transcriptase is known for both nucleoside based inhibitors and non-nucleoside based inhibitors. Nucleoside based HIV inhibitors in the treatment of AIDS. In 1985, it was reported that the synthetic nucleoside 3′-azido-3′-deoxythymidine (AZT) inhibits the replication of human immunodeficiency virus. Since then, a number of other synthetic nucleosides, including 3′-azidoguanosine (AZG), 2′,3′-dideoxycytidine (ddC), 2′,3′-dideoxyadenosine (ddA), 3′-fluoro-3′-deoxythymidine (FDDT) and 2′,3′-dideoxyinosine (ddI) have been proven to be effective against HIV. After cellular phosphorylation to the 5′-triphosphate by cellular kinases, these synthetic nucleosides are incorporated into a growing strand of viral DNA, causing chain termination due to the absence of the 3′-hydroxyl group. They can also inhibit the viral enzyme reverse transcriptase.
  • The success of various synthetic nucleosides in inhibiting the replication of HIV in vivo or in vitro has led a number of researchers to design and test nucleosides that substitute a heteroatom for the carbon atom at the 3′-position of the nucleoside. Norbeck, et al., disclosed that (±)-1-[(2β,4β)-2-(hydroxymethyl)-4-dioxolanyl]thymine (referred to as (±)-dioxolane-T) exhibits a modest activity against HIV (EC50 of 20 μM in ATH8 cells), and is not toxic to uninfected control cells at a concentration of 200 μM Tetrahedron Letters 30 (46), 6246, (1989). European Patent Application Publication No. 0 337 713 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,041,449, assigned to BioChem Pharma, Inc., disclose racemic 2-substituted-4-substituted-1,3-dioxolanes that exhibit antiviral activity.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,047,407 and European Patent Application Publication No. 0 382 526, also assigned to BioChem Pharma, Inc., disclose that a number of racemic 2-substituted-5-substituted-1,3-oxathiolane nucleosides have antiviral activity, and specifically report that the racemic mixture of 2-hydroxymethyl-5-(cytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane (referred to below as BCH-189) has approximately the same activity against HIV as AZT, and little toxicity. BCH-189 has also been found to inhibit the replication of AZT-resistant HIV isolates in vitro from patients who have been treated with AZT for longer than 36 weeks. The (−)-enantiomer of the β-isomer of BCH-189, known as 3TC, which is highly potent against HIV and exhibits little toxicity, has been approved for the treatment of HIV in humans by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration in combination with AZT.
  • It has also been disclosed that cis-2-hydroxymethyl-5-(5-fluorocytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane (“FTC”) has potent HIV activity. Schinazi, et al., “Selective Inhibition of Human Immunodeficiency viruses by Racemates and Enantiomers of cis-5-Fluoro-1-[2-(Hydroxymethyl)-1,3-Oxathiolane-5-yl]Cytosine” Antimicrobial Agents and Chemo-therapy, November. 1992, page 2423-2431. See also U.S. Pat. No. 5,210,085; U.S. Pat. No. 5,204,466, WO 91/11186, and WO 92/14743.
  • A number of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides have been shown to have potent anti-HIV-1 activity. 2′,3′-Dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-thymidine (“D4T”; also referred to as 1-(2,3-dideoxy-β-D-glycero-pent-2-eno-furanosyl)thymine) is currently sold for the treatment of HIV under the name Stavudine by Bristol Myers Squibb. Other D4 nucleosides that have been tested include 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-cytidine (“D4C”), 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-uridine (“D4U”), 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-adenosine (“D4A”), 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-inosine (“D4I”), and 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-guanosine (“D4G”).
  • Other 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydronucleosides have been reported to be effective against HIV and/or HBV. Starrett, Jr. et al., in U.S. Pat. No. 4,904,770, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,130,421, and Skonezny et al., in U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,099, disclose processes for the preparation of compounds of formula:
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00001
    • wherein X and Z are selected from N or CH;
    • Y is selected from CR2 or N
    • R2 is selected from H, unsubstituted and halo-substituted alkyl having formula CnH2nA and alkenyl having the formula (CH2)m—CH═CHA wherein m=0, 1, 2 or 3 and n is 1, 2 or 3; and A is H, F, Cl, Brand I; and
    • R4 is NH2 or OH, useful as antiviral agents against HIV.
  • Belica et al., in U.S. Pat. No. 4,900,828, disclose a process for the preparation of a compound of formula
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00002
    • wherein R is a substituted or unsubstituted 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propanoyl, 2-acetoxypropanoyl or 2-acetoxybenzoyl, optionally substituted with a lower alkyl, aryl or aralkyl;
    • R′ is a substituted or unsubstituted lower alkyl, aryl, aralkyl optionally substituted with halogen, alkyl, nitro or alkoxy;
    • which is used to prepare 2′,3′-dideoxynucleosides such as 2,3′-dideoxycytidine (ddC). See also Manchand P.S., J. Org. Chem., 1992, 57, 3473.
  • In particular, β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine or β-D-D4FC, having the structure
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00003
    exhibits potent anti-HIV activity in vitro and demonstrates no cross-resistance with all approved anti-HIV agents. See Schinazi et al., J. Med. Chem. 1999, 42,859-867.
  • Also see Schinazi et al., in U.S. Pat. No. 5,703,058 which discloses a method and composition for compounds of formula
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00004
    • wherein Y is O, S, CH2, CHF, CF2;
    • Z is O, S or Se;
    • R1 is H or F;
    • R2 is H, OH, C1-C6 alkyl or C(O)C1-C6alkyl; and
    • R3 is H, C(O)C1-C6alkyl, alkyl or mono-, di- or tri-phosphate;
    • for the treatment of HIV and HBV infections in humans and other host animals.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 6,232,300 and International Patent Application No. PCT/US96/00965, published as WO 96/22778 discloses a method for the treatment of HIV using β-D-D4FC. U.S. Pat. No. 5,703,058 discloses a method for the treatment of HIV and HBV infection that includes administering an effective amount of β-L-D4FC in combination or alternation with cis-2-hydroxymethyl-5-(5-fluorocytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane, cis-2-hydroxymethyl-5-(cytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane, 9-[4-(hydroxy-methyl)-2-cyclopenten-1-yl)-guanine (carbovir), 9-[(2-hydroxyethoxy)methyl]guanine (acyclovir), interferon, 3′-deoxy-3′-azido-thymidine (AZT), 2′,3′-dideoxyinosine (DDI), 2′,3′-dideoxycytidine (DDC), (−)-2′-fluoro-5-methyl-β-L-ara-uridine (L-FMAU) or 2′,′3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxythymidine (D4T). U.S. Pat. No. 5,905,070 discloses a method for the treatment of HIV and HBV infection that includes administering an effective amount of β-D-D4FC in combination or alternation with cis-2-hydroxymethyl-5-(5-fluorocytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane, cis-2-hydroxymethyl-5-(cytosin-1-yl)-1,3-oxathiolane, 9-[4-(hydroxymethyl)-2-cyclopenten-1-yl)-guanine (carbovir), 9-[(2-hydroxyethoxy)methyl]guanine (acyclovir), interferon, 3′-deoxy-3′-azido-thymidine (AZT), 2′,3′-dideoxyinosine (DDI), 2′,3′-dideoxycytidine (DDC), (−)-2′-fluoro-5-methyl-β-L-ara-uridine (L-FMAU) or 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxythymidine (D4T).
  • European Patent Application Publication No. 0 409 227 A2 filed by Ajinomoto Co., Inc., discloses β-D-D4FC (Example 2) and its use to treat hepatitis B. Netherlands Patent No. 8901258 filed by Stichting Rega V. Z. W. discloses generally 5-halogeno-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrocytidine derivatives for use in treating HIV and hepatitis B (“HBV”).
  • Due to the importance of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides, and in particular, β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine (“β-D-D4FC”), as potent antihuman immunodeficiency virus agents, there is a need for a commercial or industrial. scale process for the synthesis of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides, and in-particular, β-D-D4FC. On addition, natural and unnatural D4 nucleosides can serve as synthetic intermediates for the preparation of a large variety of other nucleoside analogs, including but not limited to 2′,3′-dideoxy, and 2′ or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analogs as well as additional derivatives obtained by subsequent functional group manipulations. In view of the importance of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides, it is desirable to have a facile, efficient and general route of synthesis of these compounds. While several methods exist for the synthesis of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides, none has the ability to produce efficiently both enantiomeric forms of these compounds using purine bases, pyrimidine bases, heteroaromatics or heterocycles.
  • Several syntheses for the preparation of β-D-D4FC or its enantiomer, β-L-D4FC, have been reported. See Schinazi R. F. et al, J. Med. Chem. 1999, 42,859-867; Chen S., Biorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8(1998) 3245-3250; Doyle, T. W., et al., J. Org. Chem. 1997,62, 3449-3452; Cheng, Y., et al., J. Med. Chem. 1996, 62, 1757-1759; and Lin et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,561,120.
  • One of the earliest syntheses of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides is the published process for the preparation of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-thymidine (D4T). The first reported method to produce D4T involved the base promoted elimination of 3′-O-sulfonyl esters of 2′-deoxynucleosides. This synthetic route is limited to pyrimidine nucleosides and cannot be used in the production of purine nucleosides. Horwitz, J. P., et a., J. Org. Chem. 1966, 31, 205; Horwitz, J. P., et al., J. Org. Chem. 1967, 32, 817; and Horwitz, J. P., et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1964, 86, 1896.
  • Some 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides have been obtained directly from the corresponding ribonucleosides through their reaction with acetoxyisobutyryl halides, followed by the reductive elimination of the 2′,3′-acetoxy-2′,3′-halogeno derivatives with chromous ion. U.S. Pat. No. 3,817,982 (1974); Chem. Abstr. 1974, 81, 63942; Russell, A. F., et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1973, 95, 4025; Jain, T. C., et al., J. Org. Chem. 1974, 39, 30; Classon, B., et al., Acta Chem. Scand. Sect B 1982, 32, 251; Robins, M. J., et al., Tetrahedron Letters 1984, 25, 367. In a variation of this method, zinc in dimethylformamide can be used instead of chromous acetate. Robins, M. J., et al., Tetrahedron Letters 1984, 25, 367. The reaction is difficult, and results in several. products, and is therefore an inefficient route to obtain the 2′,3′-unsaturated compounds (Jain, T. C., et al., J. Org. Chem. 1974, 39, 30).
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,455,339 to Chu describes a method for preparing 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides via dialkyl xanthate intermediates including:
    • (i) preparing a nucleoside derivative of the general structure:
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00005
      wherein B is a nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur heterocycle of from C1 to C15, Y is a suitable oxygen protecting group, each R is C(S)SR′, where R′ is an alkyl or cyanoalkyl group of C1 to C15, or both R's together are>C═S;
    • (ii) activating the 2′ and 3′ hydroxyls to form 2′,3′-thiocarbonates; and then
    • (iii) deoxygenating the nucleoside derivative to the corresponding 2′,3′-dieoxy-2′,3′-didehydronucleoside.
  • U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,703,058; 5,905,070 and 6,232,300 and International Patent Application No. PCT/US96/00965, published as WO 96/22778 to Raymond F. Schinazi and Dennis C. Liotta describes [5-carboxamido or 5-fluoro]-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-pyrimidine nucleosides and [5-carboxamido or 5-fluoro]-3′-modified-pyrimidine nucleosides. Example 3 of the '070 patent provides a process for the preparation of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides. The patent states that the procedure can be adapted for a wide variety of bases and can be used to provide either the β-D or the β-L isomer as desired. The process is illustrated below:
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00006
    wherein MMPP is magnesium monoperoxyphthalate, R is t-butyldiphenylsilyl, and STIPP is 2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl.
  • PCT WO 99/43691 describes 2′-fluoro-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′ehydronucleosides that are useful in the treatment of viral infections. Schemes 9, 10, and 11 of the PCT describe methods for the preparation of β-L-2′-fluoro-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-nucleosides. The PCT publication states that previously, the synthesis of 2′,3′-unsaturated L-nucleosides had been accomplished via an elimination reaction starting from readily available nucleoside analogs, which involved a lengthy modification procedure. There are few examples of the synthesis of 2′,3′-unsaturated purine nucleosides by direct condensation due to the lability of the 2′,3′-unsaturated sugar moiety under the coupling conditions in the presence of a Lewis acid, except one case of the pyrimidine analog using a thiophenyl intermediate (Abdel-Medied, A. W.-S., et al., Synthesis, 1991, 313; Sujino, K., et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 1996, 37, 6133). In contrast to the 2′,3′-unsaturated sugar moiety, the 2′-fluoro-2′,3′-unsaturated sugar, which bears enhanced stability of the glycosyl bond during the condensation with a heterocycle, is more suitable for the direct coupling reaction. As illustrated below (wherein B is a purine or pyrimidine base and R is an oxygen protecting group), (R)-2′-fluorobutenolide (prepared from L-glyceraldehyde acetonide) was used as the key precursor in the preparation of 2′-fluoro-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides. From the acetonide, a mixture of E and Z isomers was obtained via the Horner-Emmons reaction in the presence of triethyl α-fluorophosphonoacetate and sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in THF (Thenappan, A., et al., J. Org. Chem., 1990, 55, 4639; Morikawa, T., et al., Chem. Pharm. Bull., 1992, 40, 3189; Patrich, T. B., et al., J. Org. Chem., 1994, 59, 1210). Due to the difficulties in separating the E and Z isomers, the mixture was carried on to the cyclization reaction under acidic conditions to give the desired lactone and uncyclized diol. The resulting mixture was converted to the silyl lactone and was subjected to reduction with DIBA1-H in CH2Cl2 at 78° C. to give the lactol. The lactol was treated with acetic anhydride to yield a key acetate intermediate, which was condensed with silylated 6-chloropurine under Vorbruggen conditions to afford anomeric mixtures of the protected nucleoside. Treatment of the protected nucleoside with TBAF in THF gave a mixture of free nucleosides that could be separated by silica gel column chromatography. The adenine analogs are obtained by the treatment of 6-chloropuridine with mercapto-ethanol and NaOMe in a steel bomb at 90° C. Further treatment of the adenine analogs under the same conditions afforded the inosine analogs.
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00007
  • The above methods for the syntheses of P-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-5 fluorocytidine, or its enantiomer, β-L-D4FC, disclose synthetic routes employing combinations of toxic and/or difficult to handle reagents, linear or sequential reaction steps, and laborious chromatographic or purification steps. Consequently, these syntheses afford an inefficient synthesis of β-D-D4FC.
  • Therefore, it is another object of the present invention to provide a process for the production of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides that is facile and efficient.
  • It is an object of the present invention to provide a high yield method to manufacture 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxynucleosides, and in particular β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine.
  • It is an object of the present invention to provide a method to manufacture 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxynucleosides, and in particular β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine, which produces few undesired side products.
  • It is another object of the present invention to provide a method to manufacture 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxynucleosides, and in particular β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine, which is amenable to commercial production.
  • It is a particular object of the present invention to provide a method to manufacture 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxynucleosides, and in particular β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine, which does not require protection of the purine or pyrimidine base, such as cytosine or 5-fluorocytosine.
  • It is a particular object of the present invention to provide a method to manufacture 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxynucleosides, and in particular β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine, which does not require purification by chromatography.
  • It is a particular object of the present invention to provide a method to manufacture 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxynucleosides, and in particular β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine, which does not require the use of toxic metals.
  • It is a further object of the present invention to provide a process for the production of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides that can be used as synthetic intermediates for the preparation of a large variety of other nucleoside analogs, including but not limited to 2′,3′-dideoxy, and 2′ and 3′-deoxyribo nucleoside analogs as well as additional derivatives obtained by subsequent functional group manipulations.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention is an efficient synthetic route to 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides from available precursors with the option of introducing functionality as needed. The present invention provides an efficient commercial process of high yields, can be conducted on a gram, multigram, kilogram, or multikiligram scale, and yields stable intermediates. The invention further provides for a nonchromato-graphic separation to improve overall yield. In addition, the D4 compounds made according to the present invention can also be used as synthetic intermediates in the preparation of a variety of other nucleoside analogs, including but not limited to 2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analogs as well as additional derivatives obtained by subsequent functional group manipulations.
  • Briefly, the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of β-D and β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides starting from appropriately substituted ribonucleosides in two, optionally three steps: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; and optionally, Step (3) a deprotection. The haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.
  • The method for preparing β-D- and β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides is provided, comprising:
  • a) activating a compound of structure (1)
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00008
      • wherein B is a pyrimidine or purine base, including but not limited to, 5-fluorocytosine, 5-fluorouracil, cytosine, uracil, thymine, adenine, guanine, or inosine, and even more preferably 5-fluorocytosine or 5-fluorouracil; and
      • Y is O, S or CH2;
      • with an acyl halide of the formula X—C(═O)R1, X—C(═O)C(R1)2OC(═O)R1 or X—C(═O)phenylC(═O)OR1;
      • wherein X is a halogen (F, Cl, Br or I), and each R1 is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkyl, aryl or phenyl;
      • to form a compound of structure (2)
        Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00009
      • wherein R′ is R1, —C(R1)2OC(═O)R1 or -phenylC(═O)OR1; and
      • at least one R is halogen (F, Cl, Br or I), and at least one R is an acyl of the formula —OC(═O)R1l; and then
  • b) reducing the compound of structure (2) with a reducing agent to form a 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside of structure (3)
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00010
  • c) optionally deprotecting the nucleoside if necessary.
  • In one embodiment of the invention, the nucleoside of structure (3) is optionally further derivatized, for example by base modification or sugar modification by methods known in the art; and then optionally deprotecting the nucleoside if necessary.
  • In one embodiment, the β-D or βP-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be converted into a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside bearing a different nucleobase. For example, a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorouridine can be derivatized to form a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorocytidine. Similarly a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-uridine can be further derivatized to form a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-cytidine. Alternatively, the β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be reduced to form a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analog. For example, hydrogen reduction can be effected in ethanol with 10% palladium on carbon. Alternatively, the D4 nucleoside can be modified to form a 2′, a 3′ or a 5′-substituted-nucleoside or a combination thereof, also using known chemistry to those skilled in the art. As a non-limiting illustrative example, Townsend, et al., Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Volume 1, Plenum Press: New York, teaches oxidation of 2′3′-dideoxy-2′3′-didehydro-nucleosides with osmium tetraoxide yields a ribonucleoside. Further finctionalities can be introduced via the 2′ or 3′ hydroxyls using the teachings of Kuzuhara, H., et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,144,018 (1992) by activating and substituting the relevant hydroxyl.
  • In one particular embodiment, the present invention provides for a novel, short, and high yield three step β-D-D4FC synthesis that produces few undesired side-products.
  • The synthesis of the present invention does not require protection of the 5-fluorocytosine, purification by chromatography or use of toxic metals. Thus the process of the present invention is feasible to run on a gram, kilogram or multi-kilogram commercial scale.
  • In one illustrative embodiment of the invention, a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) is provided,
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00011
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (1)
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00012
      with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X, wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1 CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br or I;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl (C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 or C6 alkyl);
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from alkyl, preferably a lower alkyl, such as methyl, ethyl or propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (II) or (II*), or compounds of Formula (II) and (II*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00013
      wherein R3 is X; and
    • R4 is —OC(═O)CH2R1;
    • (2) contacting a compound of Formula (II) or (II* ), or compounds of Formula (II) and (II*), with a suitable reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III),
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00014
    • (3) contacting a compound of Formula (III) with a suitable base to form a compound of Formula (IV).
  • Therefore, the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of β-D-D4FC starting from 5-fluorocytidine in two, optionally three steps: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; and optionally, Step (3) a deprotection. The haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof. The method of the present invention does not require protection of the primary amine group of the cytidine. Literature precedent suggests that protection of the primary amine group of a cytidine is required for a clean and high yield reaction. See Manchand et al., J. Org. Chem. 1992, 57, 3473. The use of a combination of polar aprotic solvents in Step (1) improves the impurities profile, allows for modification of reaction rates, and/or facilitates the handling of the intermediate product(s).
  • Alternatively, in another illustrative embodiment, the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00015
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (V):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00016
      with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X, wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br, or I;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl (C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 or C6 alkyl);
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from alkyl, preferably a lower alkyl, such as methyl, ethyl or propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (VI), a compound of Formula (VI*), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00017
      wherein R3 is X; and R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—;
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (VI), the compound of Formula (VI*), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*); with a reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of an acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00018
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (VII) with an activating agent in the presence of an amine base, to form a compound of Formula (VIII):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00019
      wherein LG is a leaving group derived from the activating agent;
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII) with an aminating agent to form a compound of Formula (III),
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00020
    • (4) contacting the compound of Formula (III) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • Therefore, the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of β-D-D4FC starting from 5-fluorouridine: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; Step (3-a,b) a cytidine formation; and Step (3-c) a deprotection. The haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.
  • The procedures of the invention allow for streamlined processing since the intermediates after each step can be used directly in the subsequent reactions without having to be isolated or purified. For example, in the manufacture of β-D-D4FC from 5-fluorocytidine, Step (1) is optionally carried forward into Step (2) as a solution in a suitable aprotic solvent. Similarly the product(s) of Step (2) is optionally carried forward into Step (3) as a solution in a suitable solvent. The conditions used in Step (3), a catalytic amount of base in a suitable solvent, allow for a simple isolation of the final product β-D-D4FC. The use of a catalytic amount of the base facilitates isolation of the product since the base can be soluble in the suitable solvent used for Step (3). The product β-D-D4FC precipitates and/or crystallizes out of the solution upon removal of the suitable solvent. A second (re)crystallization can be performed to improve the purity of β-D-D4FC.
  • Alternatively, in the manufacture of β-D-D4FC from 5-fluorocytidine, Step (1) is optionally carried forward into Step (2) as a solution in a suitable aprotic solvent. Similarly the product(s) of Step (2) and (3-a,b) are optionally carried forward into Step (3-c) as a solution in a suitable solvent. The conditions used in Step (3-c), a catalytic amount of base in a suitable solvent, allow for a simple isolation of the final product β-D-D4FC. The use of a catalytic amount of the base facilitates isolation of the product since the base can be soluble in the suitable solvent used for Step (3-c). The product β-D-D4FC precipitates and/or crystallizes out of the solution upon removal of the suitable solvent. A second (re)crystallization can be performed to improve the purity of β-D-D4FC.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention is an efficient synthetic route to 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides from available precursors with the option of introducing functionality as needed. The present invention provides an efficient commercial process of high yields, can be conducted on a gram, multigram, kilogram, or multikiligram scale, and yields stable intermediates. The invention further provides for a nonchromato-graphic separation to improve overall yield. In addition, the D4 compounds made according to the present invention can also be used as synthetic intermediates in the preparation of a variety of other nucleoside analogs, including but not limited to 2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analogs as well as additional derivatives obtained by subsequent functional group manipulations.
  • Briefly, the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of β-D and β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides starting from appropriately substituted ribonucleosides in two, optionally three steps: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; and optionally, Step (3) a deprotection. The haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.
  • The method for preparing β-D- and β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleosides is provided, comprising:
  • a) activating a compound of structure (1)
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00021
      • wherein B is a pyrimidine or purine base, including but not limited to, 5-fluorocytosine, 5-fluorouracil, cytosine, uracil, thymine, adenine, guanine, or inosine, and even more preferably 5-fluorocytosine or 5-fluorouracil; and
      • Y is O, S or CH2;
      • with an acyl halide of the formula X—C(═O)R1, X—C(═O)C(R1)2OC(═O)R1 or X—C(═O)phenylC(═O)OR1;
      • wherein X is a halogen (F, Cl, Br or I), and
      • each R1 is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkyl, aryl or phenyl; to form a compound of structure (2)
        Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00022
      • wherein R′ is R1, —C(R1)2OC(═O)R1 or -phenylC(═O)OR1; and
      • at least one R is halogen (F, Cl, Br or I), and at least one R is an acyl of the formula —OC(═O)R1; and then
  • b) reducing the compound of structure (2) with a reducing agent to form a 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside of structure (3)
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00023
  • c) optionally deprotecting the nucleoside if necessary.
  • In one embodiment of the invention, the nucleoside of structure (3) is optionally further derivatized, for example by base modification or sugar modification by methods known in the art; and then optionally deprotecting the nucleoside if necessary.
  • In one embodiment, the β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be converted into a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside bearing a different nucleobase. For example, a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorouridine can be derivatized to form a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorocytidine. Similarly a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-uridine can be further derivatized to form a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-cytidine. Alternatively, the β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be reduced to form a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analog. For example, hydrogen reduction can be effected in ethanol with 10% palladium on carbon. Alternatively, the D4 nucleoside can be modified to form a 2′, a 3′ or a 5′-substituted-nucleoside or a combination thereof, also using known chemistry to those skilled in the art. As a non-limiting illustrative example, Townsend, et al., Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Volume 1, Plenum Press: New York, teaches oxidation of 2′3′-dideoxy-2′3′-didehydro-nucleosides with osmium tetraoxide yields a ribonucleoside. Further functionalities can be introduced via the 2′ or 3′ hydroxyls using the teachings of Kuzuhara, H., et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,144,018 (1992) by activating and substituting the relevant hydroxyl.
  • In one particular embodiment, the present invention provides for a novel, short, and high yield three step β-D-D4FC synthesis that produces few undesired side-products.
  • The synthesis of the present invention does not require protection of the 5-fluorocytosine, purification by chromatography or use of toxic metals. Thus the process of the present invention is feasible to run on a gram, kilogram or multi-kilogram commercial scale.
  • In one illustrative embodiment of the invention, a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) is provided,
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00024
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I)
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00025
    • with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X, wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br or I;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl (C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 or C6 alkyl);
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from alkyl, preferably a lower alkyl, such as methyl, ethyl or propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (II) or (II*), or compounds of Formula (II) and (II*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00026
      wherein R3 is X; and
    • R4 is —OC(═O)CH2R1;
    • (2) contacting a compound of Formula (II) or (II*), or compounds of Formula (II) and (II*), with a suitable reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III),
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00027
    • (3) contacting a compound of Formula (III) with a suitable base to form a compound of Formula (IV).
  • Therefore, the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of β-D-D4FC starting from 5-fluorocytidine in two, optionally three steps: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; and optionally, Step (3) a deprotection. The haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof. The method of the present invention does not require protection of the primary amine group of the cytidine. Literature precedent suggests that protection of the primary amine group of a cytidine is required for a clean and high yield reaction. See Manchand et al., J. Org. Chem. 1992, 57, 3473. The use of a combination of polar aprotic solvents in Step (1) improves the impurities profile, allows for modification of reaction rates, and/or facilitates the handling of the intermediate product(s).
  • Alternatively, in another illustrative embodiment, the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00028
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (V):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00029
      with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X, wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br, or I;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl (C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 or C6 alkyl);
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from alkyl, preferably a lower alkyl, such as methyl, ethyl or propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (VI), a compound of Formula (VI*), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00030
      wherein R3 is X; and R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—;
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (VI), the compound of Formula (VI*), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*); with a reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of an acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00031
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (VII) with an activating agent in the presence of an amine base, to form a compound of Formula (VIII):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00032
      wherein LG is a leaving group derived from the activating agent;
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII) with an aminating agent to form a compound of Formula (III),
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00033
    • (4) contacting the compound of Formula (III) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • Therefore, the present invention discloses a method for the preparation of β-D-D4FC starting from 5-fluorouridine: Step (1) a haloacylation, such as haloacetylation, and in particular, bromoacetylation; Step (2) a reductive elimination; Step (3-a,b) a cytidine formation; and Step (3-c) a deprotection. The haloacylation of step (1) can form the 2′-acyl-3′-halonucleoside, the 3′-acyl-2′-halonucleoside, or a mixture thereof.
  • The procedures of the invention allow for streamlined processing since the intermediates after each step can be used directly in the subsequent reactions without having to be isolated or purified. For example, in the manufacture of β-D-D4FC from 5-fluorocytidine, Step (1) is optionally carried forward into Step (2) as a solution in a suitable aprotic solvent. Similarly the product(s) of Step (2) is optionally carried forward into Step (3) as a solution in a suitable solvent. The conditions used in Step (3), a catalytic amount of base in a suitable solvent, allow for a simple isolation of the final product β-D-D4FC. The use of a catalytic amount of the base facilitates isolation of the product since the base can be soluble in the suitable solvent used for Step (3). The product β-D-D4FC precipitates and/or crystallizes out of the solution upon removal of the suitable solvent. A second (re)crystallization can be performed to improve the purity of β-D-D4FC.
  • S Alternatively, in the manufacture of β-D-D4FC from 5-fluorocytidine, Step (1) is optionally carried forward into Step (2) as a solution in a suitable aprotic solvent. Similarly the product(s) of Step (2) and (3-a,b) are optionally carried forward into Step (3-c) as a solution in a suitable solvent. The conditions used in Step (3-c), a catalytic amount of base in a suitable solvent, allow for a simple isolation of the final product β-D-D4FC. The use of a catalytic amount of the base facilitates isolation of the product since the base can be soluble in the suitable solvent used for Step (3-c). The product δ-D-D4FC precipitates and/or crystallizes out of the solution upon removal of the suitable solvent. A second (re)crystallization can be performed to improve the purity of β-D-D4FC.
  • In a first principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00034
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00035
      with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X, wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br, or I;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from methyl, ethyl and propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (II), a compound of Formula (II*), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (II) and (II*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00036
      wherein R3 is X; and R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—;
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (II), the compound of Formula (II*), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (II) and (II*); with a suitable reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00037
    • (3) contacting the compound of Formula (III) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In a second principle embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00038
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00039
      with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═Q)X, wherein:
    • Q is R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br or I;
    • R1 is H, CH3, CH2CH3, or CH2CH2CH3;
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from methyl, ethyl and propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (II) or a compound of Formula (II*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00040
      wherein R3 is X; and R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—;
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (II) or the compound of Formula (II*) with a suitable reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00041
    • (3) contacting the compound of Formula (III) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In alternative second principle embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00042
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00043
      with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X, wherein:
    • Q is R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br or I;
    • R1 is H, CH3, CH2CH3 or CH2CH2CH3;
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from methyl, ethyl and propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a mixture of compounds of Formula (II) and (II*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00044
      wherein R3 is X; and R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—;
    • (2) contacting the mixture of compounds of Formula (II) and (II*) with a suitable. reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00045
    • (3) contacting the compound of Formula (III) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In third principle embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00046
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00047
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (II-a), a compound of Formula (II*-a), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00048
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (II-a), the compound of Formula (II*-a), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a); with a suitable reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00049
    • (3) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In one sub-embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00050
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00051
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (II-a) or a compound of Formula (II*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00052
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (II-a) or the compound of Formula (II*-a) with a suitable reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00053
    • (3) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In another sub-embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00054
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00055
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00056
    • (2) contacting the mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a) with a suitable reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00057
    • (3) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In a particular sub-embodiment, the process for the preparation of a compound of
    • Formula (IV) in the first, second or third principle embodiment is provided, wherein:
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises one polar aprotic solvent or a combination of two or more polar aprotic solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methylene chloride, tetrahydrofuran, t-butyl methyl ether, dimethoxy ethane, 2-methoxyethyl ether, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate, and isopropyl acetate;
    • in step (2), the suitable reducing agent is selected from the group consisting of: Fe, Zn—Cu couple and Zn;
    • in step (2), the suitable acid catalyst, when present, is selected from the group consisting of: acetic acid, propanoic acid, butyric acid, benzoic acid, toluene sulfonic acid, HCl, HBr, HI, and H2SO4;
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises one polar solvent or a combination of two or more polar solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethoxy ethane, and 2-methoxyethyl ether; and
    • in step (3) the suitable base is selected from the group consisting of: sodium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, C3-C6 alkyl primary amine, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium C1-C6 alkoxide.
  • In an even more particular sub-embodiment, the process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) in the first principle embodiment is provided, wherein:
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises a combination of acetonitrile and ethyl acetate;
    • in step (2), the suitable reducing agent is Zn—Cu couple;
    • in step (2), the suitable acid catalyst, when present, is acetic acid;
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate; and
    • in step (3) the suitable base is sodium methoxide.
  • In fourth principle embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00058
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (1):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00059
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent comprising a combination of acetonitrile and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of acetonitrile to ethyl acetate is 1:4; to form a compound of Formula (II-a), a compound of Formula (II*-a), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00060
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (II-a), the compound of Formula (II*-a), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a); with Zn—Cu couple in a suitable polar solvent comprising a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of methanol to ethyl acetate is in the range of 1:2 to 1:4; optionally in the presence of acetic acid, to form a compound of Formula (III-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00061
    • (3) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with sodium methoxide to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In one sub-embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00062
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00063
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent comprising a combination of acetonitrile and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of acetonitrile to ethyl acetate is 1:4; to form a compound of Formula (II-a) or a compound of Formula (II*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00064
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (II-a) or the compound of Formula (II*-a); with Zn—Cu couple in a suitable polar solvent comprising a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of methanol to ethyl acetate is in the range of 1:2 to 1:4;optionally in the presence of acetic acid, to form a compound of Formula (III-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00065
    • (3) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with sodium methoxide to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In another sub-embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00066
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00067
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent comprising a combination of acetonitrile and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of acetonitrile to ethyl acetate is 1:4; to form a mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00068
    • (2) contacting the mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a) with Zn—Cu couple in a suitable polar solvent comprising a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of methanol to ethyl acetate is in the range of 1:2 to 1:4; optionally in the presence of acetic acid, to form a compound of Formula (III-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00069
    • 3) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with sodium methoxide to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In a fifth principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00070
    wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from methyl, ethyl and propyl; comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00071
      with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X, wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br or I;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from methyl, ethyl and propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (II), a compound of Formula (II*), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (II) and (II*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00072
      wherein R3 is X; and R4 is R1H2C(═O)O—; and
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (II), the compound of Formula (II*), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (II) and (II*); with a suitable reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III).
  • In a sixth embodiment, the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III) wherein:
    • in step (1) the acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X comprises:
    • 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide,
    • 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl bromide,
    • 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl bromide, or
    • 12-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl bromide;
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises one polar aprotic solvent or a combination of two or more polar aprotic solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methylene chloride, tetrahydrofuran, t-butyl methyl ether, dimethoxy ethane, 2-methoxyethyl ether, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate, and isopropyl acetate;
    • in step (2), the suitable reducing agent is selected from the group consisting of: Fe, Zn—Cu couple and Zn;
    • in step (2), the suitable acid catalyst, when present, is selected from the group consisting of: acetic acid, propanoic acid, butyric acid, benzoic acid, toluene sulfonic acid, HCl, HBr, HI, and H2SO4; and
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises one polar solvent or a combination of two or more polar solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethoxy ethane, and 2-methoxyethyl ether.
  • In seventh principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III-a):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00073
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (1):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00074
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (II-a), a compound of Formula (II*-a), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00075
    • (2) contacting the, compound of Formula (II-a), the compound of Formula (II*-a), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a); with a suitable reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III-a).
  • In one sub-embodiment, the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III-a):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00076
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (1):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00077
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent comprising a combination of acetonitrile and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of acetonitrile to ethyl acetate is 1:4; to form a compound of Formula (II-a), a compound of Formula (II*-a), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00078
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (II-a), the compound of Formula (II*-a), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (II-a) and (II*-a); with Zn—Cu couple in a suitable polar solvent comprising a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of methanol to ethyl acetate is in the range of 1:2 to 1:4; optionally in the presence of acetic acid, to form a compound of Formula (III-a).
  • In a particular sub-embodiment, the process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) in the fifth, sixth or seventh principle embodiment is provided, wherein:
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises one polar aprotic solvent or a combination of two or more polar aprotic solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methylene chloride, tetrahydrofuran, t-butyl methyl ether, dimethoxy ethane, 2-methoxyethyl ether, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate, and isopropyl acetate;
    • in step (2), the suitable reducing agent is selected from the group consisting of: Fe, Zn—Cu couple and Zn;
    • in step (2), the suitable acid catalyst, when present, is selected from the group consisting of: acetic acid, propanoic acid, butyric acid, benzoic acid, toluene sulfonic acid, HCl, HBr, HI, and H2SO4;
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises one polar solvent or a combination of two or more polar solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethoxy ethane, and 2-methoxyethyl ether; and
    • in step (3) the suitable base is selected from the group consisting of: sodium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, C3-C6 alkyl primary amine, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium C1-C6 alkoxide.
  • In an even more particular sub-embodiment, the process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) in the first principle embodiment is provided, wherein:
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises a combination of acetonitrile and ethyl acetate;
    • in step (2), the suitable reducing agent is Zn—Cu couple;
    • in step (2), the suitable acid catalyst, when present, is acetic acid;
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate; and
    • in step (3) the suitable base is sodium methoxide.
  • In an eighth principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (II) or (II*):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00079
    or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
    • Q is R1CH2— or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
    • R2 is independently selected from methyl, ethyl and propyl;
    • R3 is Cl, Br or I; and
    • R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—.
  • In a ninth principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (II-a) or (II*-a),
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00080
    or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • In a tenth principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (III):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00081
    or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
    • Q is R1CH2— or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl; and
    • R2 is independently selected from methyl, ethyl and propyl.
  • In an eleventh principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (III-a),
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00082
    or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • In a twelfth principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00083
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (V):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00084
      with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X, wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br, or I;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, and propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (VI), a compound of Formula (VI*), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00085
      wherein R3 is X; and R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—;
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (VI), the compound of Formula (VI*), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*); with a reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of an acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (VII):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00086
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (III) with an activating agent in the presence of an amine base, to form a compound of Formula (VIII):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00087
      wherein LG is a leaving group derived from the activating agent;
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII) with an aminating agent to form a compound of Formula (III),
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00088
    • (4) contacting the compound of Formula (III) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In one sub-embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00089
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (V):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00090
      with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X, wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br, or I;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, and propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00091
      wherein R3 is X; and R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—;
    • (2) contacting the mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*); with a reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of an acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (VII):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00092
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (VII) with an activating agent in the presence of an amine base, to form a compound of Formula (VIII):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00093
      wherein LG is a leaving group derived from the activating agent;
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII) with an aminating agent to form a compound of Formula (III),
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00094
    • (4) contacting the compound of Formula (III) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In a thirteenth principle embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV), wherein:
  • in step (1) the acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X comprises:
    • 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide,
    • 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl bromide,
    • 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl bromide, or
    • 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl bromide;
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises one polar aprotic solvent or a combination of two or more polar aprotic solvents, and is selected from the group consisting of: methylene chloride, tetrahydrofuran, t-butyl methyl ether, dimethoxy ethane, 2-methoxyethyl ether, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate, and isopropyl acetate;
    • in step (2), the reducing agent is selected from the group consisting of: Fe, Zn—Cu couple and Zn;
    • in step (2), the acid catalyst, when present, is selected from the group consisting of: acetic acid, propanoic acid, butyric acid, benzoic acid, toluene sulfonic acid, HCl, HBr, HI, and H2SO4;
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises one polar solvent or a combination of two or more polar solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethoxy ethane, and 2-methoxyethyl ether;
    • in step (3-a) the activating agent is selected from the group consisting of: methanesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethyl sulfonyl chloride, ethanesulfonyl chloride, benzenesulfonyl chloride, p-toluene-sulfonyl chloride, triazole/phosphorus oxychloride and triazole/dipbenyl chloro-phosphate;
    • in step (3-a) the amine base is selected from the group consisting of: triethylamine, tributylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N,N-diisopropyl-ethylamine, N,N-dimethylcyclohexylamine, N,N-diethylcyclohexylamine, N,N-dimethyloctylamine, tetramethylethylenediamine, pyridine, N,N-dimethyl-aminopyridine, 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene, and 1,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene;
    • in step (3-a) the leaving group LG is selected from the group consisting, of methanesulfonyloxy, trifluoromethyl-sulfonyloxy, ethanesulfonyloxy, benzenesulfonyloxy, toluenesulfonyloxy, and triazolyl;
    • in step (3-b) the aminating agent is selected from the group consisting of: NH3, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium carbonate; and
    • in step (3-c) the suitable base is selected from the group consisting of: sodium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, C3-C6 alkyl primary amine, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium C1-C6 alkoxide.
  • In a fourteenth principle embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00095
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00096
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (VI-a), a compound of Formula (VI*-a), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00097
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (VI-a), the compound of Formula (VI*-a), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a); with a reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of an acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (VII-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00098
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (VII-a) with an activating agent selected from the group consisting of:
      • i) an aryl sulfonyl halide,
      • ii) an alkyl sulfonyl halide, and
      • iii) 1,2,4-triazole in the presence of a phosphorus chloride;
        in the presence of an amine base, to form a compound of Formula (VIII-a);
        Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00099
        wherein LG is a leaving group derived from the activating agent;
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII-a) with an aminating agent to form a compound of Formula (III-a),
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00100
      and
    • (4) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In one sub-embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00101
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (V):,
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00102
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00103
    • (2) contacting the mixture of compounds. of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a); with a reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of an acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (VII-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00104
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (VII-a) with a activating agent selected from the group consisting of:
      • i) an aryl sulfonyl halide,
      • ii) an alkyl sulfonyl halide, and
      • iii) 1 ,2,4-triazole in the presence of a phosphorus chloride;
        in the presence of an amine base, to form a compound of Formula (VIII-a);
        Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00105
        wherein LG is a leaving group derived from the activating agent;
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII-a) with an aminating agent to form a compound of Formula (III-a),
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00106
      and
    • (4) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with a suitable base to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In a particular sub-embodiment, the process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) in the twelfth, thirteenth or fourteenth principle embodiment is provided, wherein:
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises one polar aprotic solvent or a combination of two or more polar aprotic solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methylene chloride, tetrahydrofuran, t-butyl methyl ether, dimethoxy ethane, 2-methoxyethyl ether, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate, and isopropyl acetate;
    • in step (2), the reducing agent is selected from the group consisting of: Fe, Zn—Cu couple and Zn;
    • in step (2), the acid catalyst, when present, is selected from the group consisting of: acetic acid, propanoic acid, butyric acid, benzoic acid, toluene sulfonic acid, HCl, HBr, HI, and H2SO4;
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises one polar solvent or a combination of two or more polar solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethoxy ethane, and 2-methoxyethyl ether;
    • in step (3-a) the activating agent is selected from the group consisting of:
      • methanesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethyl sulfonyl chloride, ethanesulfonyl chloride, benzenesulfonyl chloride,
      • p-toluene-sulfonyl chloride, triazole/phosphorus oxychloride and triazole/diphenyl chloro-phosphate;
    • in step (3-a) the amine base is selected from the group consisting of: triethylamine, tributylamine,
      • N-methylmorpholine, N,N-diisopropyl-ethylamine, tetramethylethylenediamine, pyridine,
      • N,N-dimethyl-aminopyridine,
      • 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, and
      • 1 ,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene;
    • in step (3-a) the leaving group LG is selected from the group consisting of
      • methanesulfonyloxy, trifluoromethyl-sulfonyloxy, ethanesulfonyloxy, benzenesulfonyloxy, toluenesulfonyloxy, and triazolyl;
    • in step (3-b) the aminating agent is selected from the group: NH3, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium carbonate; and
    • in step (3-c) the suitable base is selected from the group consisting of: sodium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, C3-C6 alkyl primary amine, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium C1-C6 alkoxide.
  • In an even more particular sub-embodiment, the process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) in the twelfth, thirteenth or fourteenth principle embodiment is provided, wherein:
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises one solvent which is acetonitrile;
    • in step (2), the reducing agent is Zn—Cu couple;
    • in step (2), the acid catalyst, when present, is acetic acid;
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate;
    • in step (3-a) the activating agent is triazole/phosphorus oxychloride;
    • in step (3-a) the amine base is triethylamine;
    • in step (3-a) the leaving group LG is triazolyl;
    • in step (3-b), the animating agent is NH3; and
    • in step (3-c) the suitable base is sodium methoxide.
  • In a fifteenth principle embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00107
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (I):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00108
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in acetonitrile to form a compound of Formula (VI-a), a compound of Formula (VI*-a), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00109
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (VI-a), the compound of Formula (VI*-a), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a); with Zn—Cu couple in a suitable polar solvent comprising a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of methanol to ethyl acetate is in the range of 1:2 to 1:4; optionally in the presence of acetic acid, to form a compound of Formula (VII-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00110
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (VII-a) with 1,2,4-triazole/phosphorus oxychloride, in the presence of triethylamine, to form a compound of Formula (VIII-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00111
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII-a) with NH3, to form a compound of Formula (III-a), and
    • (4) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with sodium methoxide to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In one sub-embodiment the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00112
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (V):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00113
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in acetonitrile to form a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00114
    • (2) contacting the mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a); with Zn—Cu couple in a suitable polar solvent comprising a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of methanol to ethyl acetate is in the range of 1:2 to 1:4; optionally in the presence of acetic acid, to form a compound of Formula (VII-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00115
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with 1,2,4-triazole/phosphorus oxychloride, in the presence of triethylamine, to form a compound of Formula (VIII-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00116
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII-a) with NH3, to form a compound of Formula (III-a), and
    • (4) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with sodium methoxide to form the compound of Formula (IV).
  • In a sixteenth principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00117
    wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, and propyl; comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (V):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00118
      with an acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X, wherein:
    • Q is 2-(R1CH2CO2)phenyl—, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • X is Cl, Br, or I;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
    • R2, at each occurrence, is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, and propyl;
    • in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (VI), a compound of Formula (VI*), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00119
      wherein R3 is X; and R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—;
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (VI), the compound of Formula (VI*), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*); with a reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of an acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (VII):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00120
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (VII) with an activating agent in the presence of an amine base, to form a compound of Formula (VIII):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00121
      wherein LG is a leaving group derived from the activating agent;
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII) with an aminating agent to form a compound of Formula (III).
  • In a seventeenth principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III) wherein:
    • in step (1) the acyl halide of Formula Q-C(═O)X comprises:
    • 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide,
    • 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl bromide,
    • 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl bromide, or
    • 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl bromide;
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises one polar aprotic solvent or a combination of two or more polar aprotic solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methylene chloride, tetrahydrofuran, t-butyl methyl ether, dimethoxy ethane, 2-methoxyethyl ether, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate, and isopropyl acetate;
    • in step (2), the reducing agent is selected from the group consisting of: Fe, Zn—Cu couple and Zn;
    • in step (2), the acid catalyst, when present, is selected from the group consisting of: acetic acid, propanoic acid, butyric acid, benzoic acid, toluene sulfonic acid, HCl, HBr, HI, and H2SO4;
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises one polar solvent or a combination of two or more polar solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethoxy ethane, and 2-methoxyethyl ether;
    • in step (3-a) the activating agent is selected from the group consisting of: methanesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethyl sulfonyl chloride, ethanesulfonyl chloride, benzenesulfonyl chloride, p-toluene-sulfonyl chloride, triazole/phosphorus oxychloride and triazole/diphenyl chloro-phosphate;
    • in step (3-a) the amine base is selected from the group consisting of: triethylamine, tributylamine,
    • N-methylmorpholine, N,N-diisopropyl-ethylamine,
    • N,N-dimethylcyclohexylamine,
    • N,N-diethylcyclohexylamine,
    • N,N-dimethyloctylamine, tetramethylethylenediamine,
    • pyridine, N,N-dimethyl-aminopyridine,
    • 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane,
    • 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene, and
    • 1,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene;
    • in step (3-a) the leaving group LG is selected from the group consisting of methanesulfonyloxy, trifluoromethyl-sulfonyloxy, ethanesulfonyloxy, benzenesulfonyloxy, toluenesulfonyloxy, and triazolyl;
    • in step (3-b) the aminating agent is selected from the group: NH3, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium carbonate.
  • In eighteenth principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III-a):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00122
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (V):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00123
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in a suitable polar aprotic solvent to form a compound of Formula (VI-a), a compound of Formula (VI*-a), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00124
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (VI-a), the compound of Formula (VI*-a), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a); with a reducing agent in a suitable polar solvent, optionally in the presence of an acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (VII-a);
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00125
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (VII-a) with a activating agent selected from the group consisting of:
      • i) an aryl sulfonyl halide,
      • ii) an alkyl sulfonyl halide, and
      • iii) 1,2,4-triazole in the presence of a phosphorus chloride;
        in the presence of an amine base, to form a compound of Formula (VIII-a):
        Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00126
        wherein LG is a leaving group derived from the activating agent; and
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII-a) with an aminating agent to form a compound of Formula (III-a).
  • In a particular sub-embodiment, the process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) in the sixteenth, seventeenth or eighteenth principle embodiment is provided, wherein:
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises one polar aprotic solvent or a combination of two or more polar aprotic solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: methylene chloride, tetrahydrofuran, t-butyl methyl ether, dimethoxy ethane, 2-methoxyethyl ether, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate, and isopropyl acetate;
    • in step (2), the reducing agent is selected from the group consisting of: Fe, Zn—Cu couple and Zn;
    • in step (2), the acid catalyst, when present, is selected from the group consisting of: acetic acid, propanoic acid, butyric acid, benzoic acid, toluene sulfonic acid, HCl, HBr, HI, and H2SO4;
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises one polar solvent or a combination of two or more polar solvents; and is selected from the group consisting of: ethanol, ethanol, propanol, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethoxy ethane, and 2-methoxyethyl ether; and
    • in step (3-a) the activating agent is selected from the group consisting of: methanesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethyl sulfonyl chloride, ethanesulfonyl chloride, benzenesulfonyl chloride, p-toluene-sulfonyl chloride, triazole/phosphorus oxychloride and triazole/diphenyl chloro-phosphate;
    • in step (3-a) the amine base is selected from the group consisting of: triethylamine, tributylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N,N-diisopropyl-ethylamine, tetramethylethylenediamine, pyridine, N,N-dimethyl-aminopyridine, 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, and 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene;
    • in step (3-a) the leaving group LG is selected from the group consisting of methanesulfonyloxy, trifluoromethyl-sulfonyloxy, ethanesulfonyloxy, benzenesulfonyloxy, toluenesulfonyloxy, and triazolyl; and
    • in step (3-b) the aminating agent is selected from the group: NH3, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium carbonate.
  • In an even more particular sub-embodiment, the process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) in the sixteenth, seventeenth or eighteenth principle embodiment is provided, wherein:
    • in step (1), the suitable polar aprotic solvent comprises one solvent which is acetonitrile;
    • in step (2), the reducing agent is Zn—Cu couple;
    • in step (2), the acid catalyst, when present, is acetic acid;
    • in step (2), the suitable polar solvent comprises a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate;
    • in step (3-a) the activating agent is triazole/phosphorus oxychloride;
    • in step (3-a) the amine base is triethylamine;
    • in step (3-a) the leaving group LG is triazolyl; and
    • in step (3-b), the aminating agent is NH3.
  • In a nineteenth principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a process for the preparation of a compound of Formula (III-a):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00127
    comprising:
    • (1) contacting a compound of Formula (V):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00128
      with 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide in acetonitrile to form a compound of Formula (VI-a), a compound of Formula (VI*-a), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00129
    • (2) contacting the compound of Formula (VI-a), the compound of Formula (VI*-a), or the mixture of compounds of Formula (VI-a) and (VI*-a); with Zn—Cu couple in a suitable polar solvent comprising a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate, wherein the ratio of methanol to ethyl acetate is in the range of 1:2 to 1:4; optionally in the presence of acetic acid, to form a compound of Formula (VII-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00130
    • (3a) contacting the compound of Formula (III-a) with 1,2,4-triazole/phosphorus oxychloride, in the presence of triethylamine, to form a compound of Formula (VIII-a):
      Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00131
      and
    • (3b) contacting the compound of Formula (VIII-a) with NH3, to form a compound of Formula (III-a).
  • In a twentieth principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (VI) or (VI*):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00132
    or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
    • Q is R1CH2— or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
    • R2 is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, and propyl;
    • R3 is Cl, Br, or I; and
    • R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—.
  • In a twenty-first principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (VI-a) or (VI*-a):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00133
    or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • In a twenty-second principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (VII):
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00134
    or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
    • Q is R1CH2— or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
    • R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl; and
    • R2 is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, and propyl.
  • In a twenty-third principle embodiment, the present invention provides for a compound of Formula (VII-a),
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00135
    or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
  • The present invention is useful for the preparation of β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine which is useful as an agent for inhibiting the growth or replication of HIV.
  • The process of the present invention is also useful for the preparation of β-D-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine which is useful as human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) reverse transcriptase inhibitor. Such HIV reverse transcriptase inhibitor is useful for the inhibition of HIV in an ex vivo sample containing HIV or expected to be exposed to HIV. Thus, such HIV reverse transcriptase inhibitor can be used to inhibit HIV present in a body fluid sample (for example, a body fluid or semen sample) which contains or is suspected to contain or be exposed to HIV. Such HIV reverse transcriptase inhibitor is also useful as standards or reference compounds for use in tests or assays for determining the ability of an agent to inhibit viral replication and/or HIV reverse transcriptase, for example in a pharmaceutical research program. Thus, such HIV reverse transcriptase inhibitor can be used as a control or reference compound in such assays and as a quality control standard.
  • I. Stereoisomerism and Polymorphism
  • Compounds of the present invention have at least two chiral centers, and can exist in and be isolated in optically active and racemic forms. Some compounds can exhibit polymorphism. The present invention encompasses racemic, optically-active, polymorphic, chiral, diastereomeric or stereoisomeric form, or mixtures thereof, of a compound of the invention, which possess the useful properties described herein. It will be appreciated that certain compounds of the present invention contain an asymmetrically substituted carbon atom, and can be isolated in optically active or racemic forms. The optically active forms can be prepared by, for example, resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase or by enzymatic resolution. All chiral, diastereomeric, racemic forms and all geometric isomeric forms of a structure are intended, unless the specific stereochemistry or isomer form is specifically indicated.
  • Optically active forms of the compounds can be prepared using any method known in the art, including by resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase.
  • Examples of methods to obtain optically active materials include at least the following.
      • i) physical separation of crystals—a technique whereby macroscopic crystals of the individual enantiomers are manually separated. This technique can be used if crystals of the separate enantiomers exist, i.e., the material is a conglomerate, and the crystals are visually distinct;
      • ii) simultaneous crystallization—a technique whereby the individual enantiomers are separately crystallized from a solution of the racemate, possible only if the latter is a conglomerate in the solid state;
      • iii) enzymatic resolutions—a technique whereby partial or complete separation of a racemate by virtue of differing rates of reaction for the enantiomers with an enzyme;
      • iv) enzymatic asymmetric synthesis—a synthetic technique whereby at least one step of the synthesis uses an enzymatic reaction to obtain an enantiomerically pure or enriched synthetic precursor of the desired enantiomer;
      • v) chemical asymmetric synthesis—a synthetic technique whereby the desired enantiomer is synthesized from an achiral precursor under conditions that produce asymmetry (i.e., chirality) in the product, which can be achieved using chiral catalysts or chiral auxiliaries;
      • vi) diastereomer separations—a technique whereby a racemic compound is reacted with an enantiomerically pure reagent (the chiral auxiliary) that converts the individual enantiomers to diastereomers. The resulting diastereomers are then separated by chromatography or crystallization by virtue of their now more distinct structural differences and the chiral auxiliary later removed to obtain the desired enantiomer;
      • vii) first- and second-order asymmetric transformations—a technique whereby diastereomers from the racemate equilibrate to yield a preponderance in solution of the diastereomer from the desired enantiomer or where preferential crystallization of the diastereomer from the desired enantiomer perturbs the equilibrium such that eventually in principle all the material is converted to the crystalline diastereomer from the desired enantiomer. The desired enantiomer is then released from the diastereomer;
      • viii) kinetic resolutions—this technique refers to the achievement of partial or complete resolution of a racemate (or of a further resolution of a partially resolved compound) by virtue of unequal reaction rates of the enantiomers with a chiral, non-racemic reagent or catalyst under kinetic conditions;
      • ix) enantiospecific synthesis from non-racemic precursors—a synthetic technique whereby the desired enantiomer is obtained from non-chiral starting materials and where the stereochemical integrity is not or is only minimally compromised over the course of the synthesis;
      • x) chiral liquid chromatography—a technique whereby the enantiomers of a racemate are separated in a liquid mobile phase by virtue of their differing interactions with a stationary phase (including via chiral HPLC). The stationary phase can be made of chiral material or the mobile phase can contain an additional chiral material to provoke the differing interactions;
      • xi) chiral gas chromatography—a technique whereby the racemate is volatilized and enantiomers are separated by virtue of their differing interactions in the gaseous mobile phase with a column containing a fixed non-racemic chiral adsorbent phase;
      • xii) extraction with chiral solvents—a technique whereby the enantiomers are separated by virtue of preferential dissolution of one enantiomer into a particular chiral solvent;
      • xiii) transport across chiral membranes—a technique whereby a racemate is placed in contact with a thin membrane barrier. The barrier typically separates two miscible fluids, one containing the racemate, and a driving force such as concentration or pressure differential causes preferential transport across the membrane barrier. Separation occurs as a result of the non-racemic chiral nature of the membrane that allows only one enantiomer of the racemate to pass through.
  • Chiral chromatography, including simulated moving bed chromatography, is used in one embodiment. A wide variety of chiral stationary phases are commercially available.
  • II. Definitions
  • The following terms and abbreviations are used herein and defined as follows. The abbreviation:
    • “rt” as used herein means room temperature,
    • “h” as used herein means hour,
    • “DMAC” as used herein means dimethylacetamide,
    • “DMI” as used herein means 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone,
    • “DMPU” as used herein means 1,3-dimethyl-3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2(1H)-pyrimidinone,
    • “DMSO” as used herein means dimethylsulfoxide,
    • “EDTA” as used herein means ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid,
    • “EtOAc” as used herein means ethylacetate,
    • “MTBE” as used herein means methyl t-butyl ether,
    • “NMP” as used herein means N-methylpyrrolidinone, and
    • “THF” as used herein means tetrahydrofuran.
  • As used herein, the term “substantially free of,” “substantially in the absence of” or “isolated” refers to a nucleoside composition that includes at least 95%, and preferably 99% to 100% by weight, of the designated enantiomer of that nucleoside. In a preferred embodiment, the process produces compounds that are substantially free of enantiomers of the opposite configuration.
  • The term alkyl, as used herein, unless otherwise specified, refers to a saturated straight, branched, or cyclic, primary, secondary, or tertiary hydrocarbon, for example, of C1 to C10, and specifically includes methyl, trifluoromethyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, pentyl, cyclopentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexylmethyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, and 2,3-dimethylbutyl. The term includes both substituted and unsubstituted alkyl groups. Moieties with which the alkyl group can be substituted are selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, sulfate, phosphonic acid, phosphate, or phosphonate, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for example, as taught in Greene, et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, hereby incorporated by reference.
  • The term lower alkyl, as used herein, and unless otherwise specified, refers to a C1 to C4 saturated straight, branched, or if appropriate, a cyclic (for example, cyclopropyl) alkyl group, including both substituted and unsubstituted forms. Unless otherwise specifically stated in this application, when alkyl is a suitable moiety, lower alkyl is preferred. Similarly, when alkyl or lower alkyl is a suitable moiety, unsubstituted alkyl or lower alkyl is preferred.
  • The term aryl, as used herein, and unless otherwise specified, refers to phenyl, biphenyl, or naphthyl. The term includes both substituted and unsubstituted moieties. The aryl group can be substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo, hydroxyl, amino, alkylamino, arylarnino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, sulfate, phosphonic acid, phosphate, or phosphonate, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for example, as taught in Greene, et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991.
  • The term “aralkyl,” as used herein, and unless otherwise specified, refers to an aryl group as defined above linked to the molecule through an alkyl group as defined above. The term “alkaryl” or “alkylaryl” as used herein, and unless otherwise specified, refers to an alkyl group as defined above linked to the molecule through an aryl group as defined above. In each of these groups, the alkyl group can be optionally substituted as describe above and the aryl group can be optionally substituted with one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, acyl, acyloxy, amino, amido, azido, carboxyl derivatives, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, thiol, imine, sulfonyl, sulfanyl, sulfinyl, sulfamonyl, ester, carboxylic acid, amide, phosphonyl, phosphinyl, phosphoryl, phosphine, thioester, thioether, acid halide, anhydride, oxime, hydrozine, carbamate, phosphonic acid, phosphonate, or any other viable functional group that does not inhibit the pharmacological activity of this compound, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for example, as taught in Greene, et al., Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, hereby incorporated by reference. Specifically included within the scope of the term aryl are phenyl; naphthyl; phenylmethyl; phenylethyl; 3,4,5-trihydroxyphenyl; 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl; 3,4,5-triethoxy-phenyl; 4-chlorophenyl; 4-methylphenyl; 3,5-di-tertiarybutyl-4-hydroxyphenyl; 4-fluorophenyl; 4-chloro-1-naphthyl; 2-methyl-1-naphthylmethyl; 2-naphthylmethyl; 4-chlorophenylmethyl; 4-t-butylphenyl; 4-t-butylphenylmethyl and the like.
  • The term alkaryl or alkylaryl refers to an alkyl group with an aryl substituent. The term aralkyl or arylalkyl refers to an aryl group with an alkyl substituent.
  • The term “alkylamino” or “arylamino” refers to an amino group that has one or two alkyl or aryl substituents, respectively.
  • As used herein, “alkyl primary amine” is intended to have the meaning well known to one skilled in the art of organic chemistry. Examples of C3-C6 alkyl primary amine are propylamine, butylamine, pentylamine, and hexylamine, including both branched and straight-chain alkyl groups.
  • The term halo, as used herein, includes bromo, chloro, fluoro, and iodo.
  • The term heteroatom, as used herein, refers to oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, and phosphorus.
  • The term acyl refers to a carboxylic acid ester in which the non-carbonyl moiety of the ester group is selected from straight, branched, or cyclic alkyl or lower alkyl, alkoxyalkyl including methoxymethyl, aralkyl including benzyl, aryloxyalkyl such as phenoxymethyl, aryl including phenyl optionally substituted with halogen, C1 to C4 alkyl or C1 to C4 alkoxy, sulfonate esters such as alkyl or aralkyl sulphonyl including methanesulfonyl, the mono, di or triphosphate ester, trityl or monomethoxytrityl, substituted benzyl, trialkylsilyl (e.g. dimethyl-t-butylsilyl) or diphenylmethylsilyl. Aryl groups in the esters optimally comprise a phenyl group. The term “lower acyl” refers to an acyl group in which the non-carbonyl moiety is lower alkyl.
  • The term “protected” as used herein and unless otherwise defined refers to a group that is added to an oxygen, nitrogen, or phosphorus atom to prevent its further reaction or for other purposes. A wide variety of oxygen and nitrogen protecting groups are known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
  • The term “substituted”, as used herein, means that one or more hydrogen on the designated atom is replaced with a selection from the indicated group, provided that the designated atom's normal valency is not exceeded, and that the substitution results in a stable compound.
  • The term purine or pyrimidine base includes, but is not limited to, adenine, N6-alkyl-purines, N6-acylpurines (wherein acyl is C(O)(alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl), N6-benzylpurine, N6-halopurine, N6-vinylpurine, N6-acetylenic purine, N6-acyl purine, N6-hydroxyalkyl purine, N6-thioalkyl purine, N2-alkylpurines, N2-alkyl-6-thiopurines, thymine, cytosine, 5-fluoro-cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, 6-azapyrimidine, including 6-aza-cytosine, 2- and/or 4-mercapto-pyrmidine, uracil, 5-halouracil, including 5-fluorouracil, C5-alkylpyrimidines, C5-benzyl-pyrimidines, C5-halopyrimidines, C5-vinylpyrimidine, C5-acetylenic pyrimidine, C5-acyl pyrimidine, C5-hydroxyalkyl purine, C5-amido-pyrimidine, C5-cyanopyrimidine, C5-nitro-pyrimidine, C5-amino-pyrimidine, N2-alkyl-purines, N2-alkyl-6-thiopurines, 5-azacytidinyl, 5-aza-uracilyl, triazolopyridinyl, imidazolo-pyridinyl, pyrrolopyrimidinyl, and pyrazolopyrimidinyl. Purine bases include, but are not limited to, guanine, adenine, hypoxanthine, 2,6-diaminopurine, 2-(Br, Fl, Cl or I)-purine optionally with a substituent including an amino or carbonyl group in the 6-position, and 6-(Br, Cl, or I)-purine optionally with a substituent including an amino or carbonyl group in the 2-position. Functional oxygen and nitrogen groups on the base can be protected as necessary or desired. Suitable protecting groups are well known to those skilled in the art, and include trimethylsilyl, dimethylhexylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl, trityl, alkyl groups, and acyl groups such as acetyl and propionyl, methanesulfonyl, and p-toluenesulfonyl.
  • These purine and pyrimidine bases can be substituted with alkyl groups or aromatic rings, bonded through single or double bonds or fused to the heterocycle ring system. The purine base and pyrimidine bases can be bound to the sugar moiety through any available atom, including the ring nitrogen and ring carbon (producing a C-nucleoside).
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug” is used throughout the specification to describe any pharmaceutically acceptable form (such as an ester, phosphate ester, salt of an ester or a related group) of a compound which, upon administration to a patient, provides the active compound. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and acids. Suitable salts include those derived from alkali metals such as potassium and sodium, alkaline earth metals such as calcium and magnesium, among numerous other acids well known in the pharmaceutical art. Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs refer to a compound that is metabolized, for example hydrolyzed or oxidized, in the host to form the compound of the present invention. Typical examples of prodrugs include compounds that have biologically labile protecting groups on a functional moiety of the active compound. Prodrugs include compounds that can be oxidized, reduced, aminated, deaminated, hydroxylated, dehydroxylated, hydrolyzed, dehydrolyzed, alkylated, dealkylated, acylated, deacylated, phosphorylated, dephosphorylated to produce the active compound.
  • In cases where compounds are sufficiently basic or acidic to form stable nontoxic acid or base salts, administration of the compound as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt can be appropriate. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and acids. Suitable salts include those derived from alkali metals such as potassium and sodium, alkaline earth metals such as calcium and magnesium, among numerous other acids well known in the pharmaceutical art. In particular, examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are organic acid addition salts formed with acids, which form a physiological acceptable anion, for example, tosylate, methanesulfonate, acetate, citrate, malonate, tartarate, succinate, benzoate, ascorbate, α-ketoglutarate, and α-glycerophosphate. Suitable inorganic salts can also be formed, including, sulfate, nitrate, bicarbonate, and carbonate salts.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts can be obtained using standard procedures well known in the art, for example by reacting a sufficiently basic compound such as an amine with a suitable acid affording a physiologically acceptable anion. Alkali metal (for example, sodium, potassium or lithium) or alkaline earth metal (for example calcium) salts of carboxylic acids can also be made.
  • Any of the nucleosides described herein can be administered as a nuclebtide prodrug to increase the activity, bioavailability, stability or otherwise alter the properties of the nucleoside. A number of nucleotide prodrug ligands are known. In general, alkylation, acylation or other lipophilic modification of the mono, di or triphosphate of the nucleoside will increase the stability of the nucleotide. Examples of substituent groups that can replace one or more hydrogens on the phosphate moiety are alkyl, aryl, steroids, carbohydrates, including sugars, 1,2-diacylglycerol and alcohols. Many are described in R. Jones and N. Bischofberger, Antiviral Research, 27 (1995) 1-17. Any of these can be used in combination with the disclosed nucleosides to achieve a desired effect.
  • The active nucleoside can also be provided as a 5′-phosphoether lipid or a 5′-ether lipid, as disclosed in the following references, which are incorporated by reference herein: Kucera, L. S., N. Iyer, E. Leake, A. Raben, Modest E. K., D. L. W., and C. Piantadosi. 1990. “Novel membrane-interactive ether lipid analogs that inhibit infectious HIV-1 production and induce defective virus formation.” AIDS Res. Hum. Retro Viruses. 6:491-501; Piantadosi, C., J. Marasco C. J., S. L. Morris-Natschke, K. L. Meyer, F. Gumus, J. R. Surles, K. S. Ishaq, L. S. Kucera, N. Iyer, C. A. Wallen, S. Piantadosi, and E. J. Modest. 1991. “Synthesis and evaluation of novel ether lipid nucleoside conjugates for anti-HIV activity.” J. Med. Chem. 34:1408.1414; Hosteller, K. Y., D. D. Richman, D. A. Carson, L. M. Stuhmiller, G. M. T. van Wijk, and H. van den Bosch. 1992. “Greatly enhanced inhibition of human immunodeficiency virus type 1 replication in CEM and HT4-6C cells by 3′-deoxythymidine diphosphate dimyristoylglycerol, a lipid prodrug of 3′-deoxythymidine.” Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 36:2025.2029; Hosetler, K. Y., L. M. Stuhmiller, H. B. Lenting, H. van den Bosch, and D. D. Richman, 1990. “Synthesis and antiretroviral activity of phospholipid analogs of azidothymidine and other antiviral nucleosides.” J. Biol. Chem. 265:61127.
  • Nonlimiting examples of U.S. patents that disclose suitable lipophilic substituents that can be covalently incorporated into the nucleoside, preferably at the 5′-OH position of the nucleoside or lipophilic preparations, include U.S. Pat. No. 5,149,794 (Sep. 22, 1992, Yatvin et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,194,654 (Mar. 16, 1993, Hostetler et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,263 (Jun. 29, 1993, Hostetler et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,256,641 (Oct. 26, 1993, Yalvin et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,411,947 (May 2, 1995, Hostetler et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,463,092 (Oct. 31, 1995, Hostetler et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,389 (Aug. 6, 1996, Yatvin et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,390 (Aug. 6, 1996, Yatvin et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,391 (Aug. 6, 1996, Yatvin et al.); and U.S. Pat. No. 5,554,728 (Sep. 10, 1996; Basava et al.), all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Foreign patent applications that disclose lipophilic substituents that can be attached to the nucleosides of the present invention, or lipophilic preparations, include WO 89/02733, W0 90/00555, W0 91/16920, W0 91/18914, W0 93/00910, W0 94/26273, W0 96/15132, EP 0 350 287, EP 93917054.4, and W0 91/19721.
  • III. Detailed Description of Process Steps
  • The present invention is contemplated to be practiced on at least a multigram scale, kilogram scale, multikilogram scale, or industrial scale. Multigram scale, as used herein, is preferably the scale wherein at least one starting material is present in 10 grams or more, more preferably at least 50 grams or more, even more preferably at least 100 grams or more. Multikilogram scale, as used herein, is intended to mean the scale wherein more than one kilogram of at least one starting material is used. Industrial scale as used herein is intended to mean a scale which is other than a laboratory scale and which is sufficient to supply product sufficient for either clinical tests or distribution to consumers.
  • The reactions of the synthetic methods claimed herein are carried out in suitable solvents which can be readily selected by one of skill in the art of organic synthesis, said suitable solvents generally being any solvent which is substantially nonreactive with the starting materials (reactants), the intermediates, or products at the temperatures at which the reactions are carried out, i.e., temperatures which can range from the solvent's freezing temperature to the solvent's boiling temperature. A given reaction can be carried out in one solvent or in a combination of two of more solvents. Depending on the particular reaction step, suitable solvents for a particular reaction step can be selected by one skilled in the art.
  • Suitable ether solvents can include, by way of example and without limitation, tetrahydrofuran, diethyl ether, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, ethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, triethylene glycol dimethyl ether, or t-butyl methyl ether.
  • Suitable ester solvents can include, by way of example and without limitation, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, n-propyl acetate, i-propyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, i-butyl acetate, t-butyl acetate, n-amyl acetate, i-amyl acetate, sec-amyl acetate, t-amyl acetate, 2,2-dimethylpropyl acetate, 2-methylbutyl acetate, methyl propionate, n-butyl propionate, ethyl butyrate, i-propyl butyrate, methyl isobutyrate, ethyl isobutyrate, i-butyl isobutyrate, methyl valerate, ethyl valerate, methyl isovalerate, ethyl isovalerate, methyl pivalate, or ethyl pivalate.
  • Suitable polar aprotic solvents can include, by way of example and without limitation, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, DMPU, DMI, NMP, formamide, N-methylacetamide, N-methyl-formamide, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, propionitrile, ethyl formate, methyl acetate, hexachloroacetone, acetone, ethyl meihyl ketone, ethyl acetate, sulfolane, N,N-dimethylpropionamide, tetramethylurea, nitromethane, nitrobenzene, or hexamethylphosphoramide.
  • Suitable polar solvents can include, by way of example and without limitation, suitable polar aprotic solvents, water, methanol, ethanol, 2-nitroethanol, 2-fluoroethanol, 2,2,2-trifluoroethanol, ethylene glycol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 2-methoxyethanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, i-butyl alcohol, t-butyl alcohol, 2-ethoxyethanol, diethylene glycol, 1-, 2-, or 3-pentanol, neo-pentyl alcohol, t-pentyl alcohol, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, cyclohexanol, benzyl alcohol, phenol, or glycerol.
  • Suitable halogenated solvents include, but are not limited to carbon tetrachloride, bromodichloromethane, dibromochloromethane, bromoform, chloroform, bromochloro-methane, dibromomethane, butyl chloride, dichloromethane, tetrachloroethylene, trichloroethylene, 1,1,1-trichloroethane, 1,1,2-trichloroethane, 1,1-dichloroethane, 2-chloropropane, hexafluorobenzene, 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, chloro-benzene, fluorobenzene, fluorotrichloromethane, chlorotrifluoromethane, bromotrifluoro-methane, carbon tetrafluoride, dichlorofluoromethane, chlorodifluoromethane, trifluoro-methane, 1,2-dichloro-tetrafluorethane and hexafluoroethane.
  • As used herein, the term “suitable reducing agent” or “reducing agent” refers to any agent which reacts with 3′-O-acyl-2′-halo-2′-deoxycytidine and/or 2′-O-acyl-3′-halo-3′-deoxycytidine, wherein —O-acyl is —O—C(═O)CH2R1 as defined herein, to remove the —O-acyl- and halo groups and form a 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxycytidine of Formula. Examples of reducing agents include, but are not limited to, Zn or Fe metals, or activated metals such as Zn—Cu.
  • As used herein, the term “suitable acid catalyst” or “acid catalyst” refers to any acidic agent such as a mineral acid or an organic acid such as a carboxylic acid, alkylsulfonic acid, or arylsulfonic acid, which catalyzes the reductive elimination of a 3-O-acyl-2′-halo-2′-deoxycytidine or 2-O-acyl-3′-halo-3′-deoxycytidine in the presence of a reducing agent to form a 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydronucleoside. Examples of mineral acids include, but are not limited to hydroiodic acid, hydrobromic acid, hydrochloric acid, and sulfuric acid. Examples of organic acids include, but are not limited to methanesulfonic acid, p-toluene-sulfonic acid, trifluoromethane sulfonic acid, formic acid, acetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, benzoic acid, and caproic acid.
  • As used herein, the term “suitable base” or “base” refers to any agent acting as a base which cleaves the 5′-O-acyl group of a compound of Formula (III) to form a free 5′-hydroxy group of a compound of Formula (IV). Examples of suitable bases include, but are not limited to, sodium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, lithium methoxide, lithium ethoxide, potassium methoxide, potassium ethoxide, ammonium hydroxide, ammonium C1-C6 alkoxide, C3-C6 alkyl primary amine, and basic resin. Examples of C3-C6 alkyl primary amine include, but are not limited to, propyl amine, butyl amine, and pentyl amine. Examples of “basic resin” include, but are not limited to, Dowex® 1X2-200 ion-exchange resin, Dowex® 1X2-400 ion-exchange resin, and Dowex® 1X4-50 ion-exchange resin. Dowex® is a registered trademark of Dow Chemical Company.
  • As used herein, the term “ammonium alkoxide” refers to a solution of ammonia dissolved in alcohol. Examples of ammonium C1-C6 alkoxide include, but are not limited to, ammonium methoxide (NH3 in methanol), ammonium ethoxide (NH3 in ethanol), ammonium propoxide (NH3 in proanol), and ammonium butoxide (NH3 in butanol).
  • As used herein, “amine base” refers to any nitrogen-containing compound which facilitates the formation of compound (VIII) from the 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrouridine compound (VII). Examples of amine bases include, but are not limited to, tertiary amines such as triethylamine, tributylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N,N-diisopropyl-ethylamine, tetramethylethylenediamine, N,N-dimethylcyclohexylamine, N,N-diethylcyclohexyl amine, N,N-dimethyloctylamine, 1,4-diazabi-cyclo-[2.2.2]-octane, 1,8-diazabicyclo-[5.4.0]-undec-7-ene, 1,5-diazabicyclo-[4.3.0]-non-5-ene, and nitrogen-containing aromatic compounds such as pyridine and N,N-dimethyl-aminopyridine.
  • As used herein, “activating agent” refers to any agent that enables the conversion of the 5-fluoro-uridine ring of (VII) into a 5-fluoro-cytidine ring by converting the oxo group in the 4-position of the uridine ring into a suitable leaving group “LG”, which in turn is displaced by an aminating agent to form the 5-fluoro-cytidine ring. Examples of an activating agent, in addition to agents known to one skilled in the art, include, but are not limited to, aryl sulfonyl halides, alkyl sulfonyl halides, and 1,2,4-triazole in the presence of a phosphorus chloride.
  • As used herein, “aryl sulfonyl halide” or “alkyl sulfonyl halide” refers to an aryl or alkyl substituted sulfonyl containing compound which reacts with the oxo of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrouridine compound (VII), in the presence of an amine base, to form a compound of Formula (VIII) wherein “LG” is an alkylsulfonyloxy or an arylsulfonyloxy group. Examples of an aryl sulfonyl halide or alkyl sulfonyl halide include, but are not limited to, methanesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethyl sulfonyl chloride, ethanesulfonyl chloride, benzenesulfonyl chloride, and p-toluene-sulfonyl chloride.
  • As used herein, “phosphorus chloride” refers to a phosphorus containing compound which, in the presence of an amine base, and 1,2,4-triazole form a compound of Formula (VIII) wherein the leaving group “LG” is the triazolyl group. Examples of a phosphorus chloride compound include, but are not limited to, phosphorus oxychloride and diphenyl chlorophosphate.
  • It is understood by one skilled in the art that the leaving group or “LG” is dependent on which activating agent is used in the process. For example when methanesulfonyl chloride is the activating agent, then methanesulfonyloxy becomes the leaving group. Examples of the leaving group disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, methanesulfonyloxy, trifluoro-methane-sulfonyloxy, ethanesulfonyloxy, benzenesulfonyloxy, p-toluenesulfonyloxy, and 1,2,4-triazolyl.
  • As used herein, “aminating agent” refers to any nitrogen-containing compound which reacts with compound (VIII) to form a cytidine (IV). Examples of suitable aminating agents include, but are not limited to NH3, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium carbonate.
  • Combinations of substituents and/or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds. By stable compound or stable structure it is meant herein a compound that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture.
  • Step One—Preparation of Activated Material
  • The key starting material for this process is an appropriately substituted β-D- or β-L-nucleoside (1)
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00136
    wherein B is a pyrimidine or purine base, including but not limited to, 5-fluorocytosine, 5-fluorburacil, cytosine, uracil, thymine, adenine, guanine, or inosine, and even more. preferably 5-fluorocytosine or 5-fluorouracil; and Y is O, S or CH2.
  • The β-D- or β-L-nucleoside can be purchased or can be prepared by any known means including standard sugar modifications and/or coupling techniques. In one embodiment, the β-D- or β-L-nucleoside is purchased.
  • The activation of the β-D- or β-L-nucleoside (1) can be achieved using a with an acyl halide of the formula X—C(═O)R1, X—C(═O)C(R1)2OC(═O)R1 or X—C(═O)phenylC(═O)OR1; wherein X is a halogen (F, Cl, Br or I), and each R1 is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkyl, aryl or phenyl, in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to form the haloacylated product (2)
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00137
    wherein R′ is R1, —C(R1)2OC(═O)R1 or -phenylC(═O)OR1; and at least one R is halogen (F, Cl, Br or I), and at least one R is an acyl of the formula —OC(═O)R1.
  • This reaction can be accomplished at any temperature that allows the reaction to proceed at an acceptable rate without promoting decomposition or excessive side products. The preferred temperature is from about 0° C. to 85° C. and even more preferably from about 35° C. to 60° C.
  • Appropriate solvents include any polar aprotic solvent including, but not limiting to, alkyl solvents such as hexane and cyclohexane, benzene, toluene, acetone, ethyl acetate, dithianes, THF, dioxane, acetonitrile, dichloromethane, dichloroethane, diethyl ether, pyridine, dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), dimethylacetamide, or any combination thereof, though preferably acetonitrile.
  • Step Two—Reduction of the Activated Material
  • The reduction of the haloacylated product (2) can be achieved using any suitable reducing agent, optionally with an acid catalyst, in a compatible solvent at a suitable temperature to form the 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside of structure (3).
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00138
  • Suitable reducing agents include any reagent that can reductively dehalogenate the haloacylated product (2) to form a 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-nucleoside of structure (3). Examples of reducing agents include, but are not limited to zinc or iron metals, or activated metals such as Zn—Cu.
  • Suitable acid catalysts include, but are not limited to, acetic acid, propionic acid, trifluoroacetic acid and hydrochloric acid, though most preferably acetic acid.
  • This reaction can be accomplished at any temperature that allows the reaction to proceed at an acceptable rate without promoting decomposition or excessive side products. The preferred temperature is from about 20° C. to 40° C. and even more preferably from about 25° C. to 35° C.
  • Appropriate solvents include any polar protic or aprotic solvent including, but not limiting to, alcohols,. such as methanol, ethanol and isopropanol, acetone, ethyl acetate, dithianes, THF, dioxane, acetonitrile, dichloromethane, dichloroethane, diethyl ether, pyridine, dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO), dimethylacetamide, or any combination thereof, preferably a combination of methanol and ethyl acetate.
  • Step Three—Optional Modification of the Base and/or Deprotection
  • In one embodiment of the invention, the nucleoside of structure (3) is optionally further derivatized, for example by base modification or sugar modification by methods known in the art; and then optionally deprotecting the nucleoside if necessary.
  • In one embodiment, the β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be converted into a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside bearing a different nucleobase. For example, a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorouridine can be derivatized to form a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorocytidine. Similarly a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-uridine can be further derivatized to form a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-cytidine. Alternatively, the β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside can be reduced to form a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy and 2′- or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside analog. For example, hydrogen reduction can be effected in ethanol with 10% palladium on carbon. Alternatively, the D4 nucleoside can be modified to form a 2′, a 3′ or a 5′-substituted-nucleoside or a combination thereof, also using known chemistry to those skilled in the art. As a non-limiting illustrative example, Townsend, et al., Chemistry of Nucleosides and Nucleotides, Volurne 1, Plenum Press: New York, teaches oxidation of 2′3′-dideoxy-2′3′-didehydro-nucleosides with osmium tetraoxide yields a ribonucleoside. Further finctionalities can be introduced via the 2′ or 3′ hydroxyls using the teachings of Kuzuhara, H., et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,144,018 (1992) by activating and substituting the relevant hydroxyl.
  • General Process from 5-Fluorocytidine
  • In one particular embodiment of the invention, the methods of the present invention, by way of example and without limitation, can be further understood by reference to Scheme 1. Scheme 1 provides the general synthetic method for the synthesis of compounds of formulae (II) through (IV) wherein Q is 2-(R1CH2C(═O)O)phen-1-yl-, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—; X is Cl, Br or I; R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl; R2 is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, or propyl; R3 is Cl, Br or I; and R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—.
  • It is to be understood that one skilled in the art of organic synthesis could follow the methods described or exemplified herein to prepare analogues of compounds of Formula (I), (II), (II*), and (III). It is the object of the present invention to provide a novel and improved process for the synthesis of β-D-D4FC which is useful as an antiviral agent which inhibits the growth or replication of HIV.
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00139
    Step (1): Haloacylation of Cytidine (I).
  • As used herein, the term “haloacylation” refers to a reaction of an acyl halide QC(═O)X with a cytidine (I) to form 3′-O-acyl-2′-halo-2′-deoxycytidine (II*) and/or 2′-O-acyl-3′-halo-3′-deoxycytidine (II), wherein —O-acyl is —O—C(O)CH2R1. An example is a bromoacetylation of fluorocytidine (I) with (AcO)(Me)2C—C(O)Br to form a 3′-O-acetyl-2′-bromo-2′-deoxycytidine (II*-a) and 2′-O-acetyl-3′-bromo-3′-deoxycytidine (II-a). (See Scheme 2)
  • Step (1) is conducted by reacting a cytidine of Formula (I) with an acyl halide of Formula Q(C═O)X in one or more suitable aprotic solvent(s) to form a compound of Formula (II), a compound of (II*), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (II) and (II*). By way of general guidance, a cytidine of Formula (I) is charged to a reaction vessel followed by addition of a suitable polar aprotic solvent(s). A suitable acyl halide of Formula Q(C═O)X, such as 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, is then charged to the vessel. After reaction is complete, the temperature of reaction is cooled to a range of about −10 to about 25° C. Then the reaction is quenched by the addition of an aqueous base solution, such as aqueous alkaline hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate solution. The pH of the reaction mixture should be closely monitored during quenching, so that the pH is between 7 to 11 upon completion of addition of the aqueous base solution. Subsequently, intermediates (II) and/or (II*) are extracted into an organic solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon solvent or an ester solvent. The preferred organic solvent for extracting intermediates (II) and/or (II*) is an ester solvent. Optionally, intermediates (II) and/or (II*) can be carried forward as a solution stream into the next step without isolation as a solid.
  • The reaction is monitored by HPLC, and is considered complete when the starting material peak for compound (I) reaches <5% by area and/or the product peaks reach >70% by area. Depending on the amount of the acyl halide used and the temperature of the reaction, reaction time ranges from about 4 to about 48 hours.
  • Suitable polar aprotic solvents include alkylnitriles, esters, halogenated hydrocarbons, ethers, dialkylformamides, or a combination of two or more suitable polar aprotic solvents. Preferred suitable polar aprotic solvents for step (1) include, but are not limited to, acetonitrile, ethyl acetate and methylene chloride. More preferred is a combination of two or more polar aprotic solvents, preferably ethyl acetate and acetonitrile. A preferred ratio of ethyl acetate to acetonitrile for step (1) is between 20:1 to 1:1. A more preferred ratio of ethyl acetate to acetonitrile is between 10:1 to 2:1. A most preferred ratio is 4:1 (EtOAc:CH3CN).
  • Suitable acyl halides include, but are not limited to, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl chloride, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl iodide, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxopropoxy)-propanoyl chloride, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxopropoxy)-propanoyl bromide, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxopropoxy)-propanoyl iodide, 2-chloro-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-bromo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-iodo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-chloro-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester pentanoic acid, 2-bromo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester pentanoic acid, 2-iodo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester pentanoic acid, 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl chloride, 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl iodide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl chloride, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl iodide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl chloride, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl bromide, or 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl iodide. More preferred suitable acyl halides include, but are not limited to, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl bromide, or 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl bromide. A most preferred suitable acyl halide is 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide.
  • A preferred amount of the suitable acyl halide is about 2.0 to about 8.0 equivalents based on one mole of the starting material 5-fluorocytidine. A more preferred amount of acyl halide for step (1) is about 3.0 to about 5.0 equivalents.
  • It is preferred to add the suitable acyl halide to the reaction vessel in about 0.5 hours to about 4 hours. A more preferred addition time of acyl halide for step (1) is about 0.5 to about 3 hours, and a most preferred addition time is about 1 hour.
  • A suitable temperature range for the addition of a suitable acyl halide of Step (1) is about 0° C. to about 60° C. A preferred suitable temperature range for the addition of a suitable acyl halide of step (1) is about 10° C. to about 40° C., and most preferred suitable temperature range is about 25° C. to about 40° C.
  • A preferred aqueous base solution is an aqueous solution of NaOH, potassium carbonate or potassium bicarbonate.
  • A preferred pH range for the reaction is from about 7.5 to about 10 upon completion of addition of the aqueous base. A most preferred pH range is in the range of about 8 to about 9.
  • It is understood that the presence of a tetrahaloammonium salt can facilitate this reaction depending on the specific cytidine and acyl halide.
  • It is understood that one skilled in the art can determine the preferred reaction time of step (1) as dependent on temperature, acyl halide, and suitable polar aprotic solvent. Generally, under the preferred conditions, the reaction time is from about 15 to about 24 hours.
  • The progress of reaction in Step (1) was monitored by HPLC using the following method:
    HPLC CONDITION
    Column: Eclipse XDB-C18, 25 cm × 4.6 mm I.D.
    Mobile phase: A: HPLC grade Acetonitrile
    B: HPLC grade water
    Gradient: t = 0 min 97% A  3% B
    t = 10 min 97% A  3% B
    t = 25 min 50% A 50% B
    t = 30 min 50% A 50% B
    Flow rate: 1.0 mL/min
    Injection volume: 5 microliters
    Stop Time: 30 minutes
    Post Time: 5 minutes
    Oven Temperature: 40° C.
    Detector: UV (220 nm)
  • Sample preparation: dissolve 25 mg of sample (dry solids weight) into a suitable solvent; adjust concentration to approximately 1 mg/ml. The sample concentration can be adjusted to ensure the proper quantitation.
  • The same HPLC method is also used to monitor reaction progress in Step (2) and Step (3).
  • Step (2): Reductive Dehalogenation.
  • This step comprises adding a suitable reducing agent to intermediates (II) and/or (II*) from step (1) in one or more. suitable polar solvent(s), optionally in the presence of a suitable acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (III). By way of general guidance, compound (II), compound (II*), or a mixture of compounds (II) and/or (II*), from Step (1) is charged (as a solution or as solids) in a reaction vessel followed by addition of a suitable polar solvent at room temperature. A suitable reducing agent such as Zn—Cu activated metal is then added to the vessel. Conditions which can facilitate the reductive elimination include the addition of an acid catalyst, such as a mineral acid or an organic acid. Preferably an acid catalyst is charged to a well-agitated mixture of the solution of compounds (II) and/or (II*) and the reducing agent over a period of about 0.5 h to about 1 hour.
  • The reaction is monitored by HPLC (see HPLC condition in Step (1)) and is considered complete when the starting material peak for (II) and/or (II*) is <5% by area. Depending on the reducing agent used and the temperature of the reaction, completion can be reached in about 0.2 h to about 48 hours. Under the preferred conditions, the reaction is complete in about 4 to about 12 hours.
  • The reducing agent, for example Zn—Cu activated metal, which can be in excess, is then removed by filtration, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product (III) is then dissolved in an ester solvent such as ethyl acetate or isopropyl acetate. A metal complexing reagent is added to the crude product solution. The metal complexing reagent. forms a solid with the metal salts which can be removed by filtration. The filtrate containing compound (III) is then washed with an aqueous solution such as aqueous ammonium and aqueous EDTA. The compound 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrocytidine (III) can be obtained by removing the solvent. The residue is then dissolve in an alcohol solvent to form a solution which is used in Step (3). A preferred alcohol solvent is methanol or ethanol. A most preferred alcohol solvent is methanol.
  • Suitable polar solvents for step (2) are dialkyl-formamide, dialkylacetamide, alcohol, alkylnitrile, ether, ester, or a combination of two or more of the suitable polar solvents. Preferred suitable polar solvents are DMF, methanol, ethanol, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1′,4-dioxane, ethyl acetate, or a combination of two or more of the suitable polar solvents. A most preferred solvent is one consisting of ethyl acetate and methanol. Preferred ratio of ethyl acetate to methanol for step (2) is between 4:1 to 1:1. Most preferred ratio is from 4:1 to 2:1.
  • Reducing agents include, but are limited to, metals such as Zn or Fe, or activated metals such as Zn—Cu couple. Preferred suitable reducing agents for step (2) are Zn and Zn—Cu couple. A most preferred suitable reducing agent is Zn—Cu couple. When Zn—Cu couple is used, the molar ratio of Zn and Cu can be between 99:1 to 1:1. Preferred molar ratio is between 99:1 to 10:1. Most preferred ratio is between 99:1 to 25:1. The preferred amount of a reducing agent is from 1.2 to 20 equivalents. Most preferred amount is from 1.5 to 3.0 equivalents.
  • Preferred suitable acid catalysts for step (2) include, but are not limited to, acetic acid, propionic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, and hydrochloric acid. A most preferred suitable acid is acetic acid.
  • A preferred amount of suitable acid catalyst for step (2) is 0.05 to 2.0 equivalents per mole of compounds (II) and/or (II*). A most preferred amount of suitable acid catalyst is from 0.05 to 0.5 equivalents.
  • A preferred temperature for step (2) is from about 20 to about 40° C. A most preferred temperature is from 25 to 35° C.
  • Suitable metal complexing reagents include potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, and sodium sulfide. The preferred metal completing reagent is potassium carbonate.
  • Step 3: Deprotection.
  • This step comprises adding a Suitable base to 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside (III) in a suitable solvent to form a compound of Formula (IV). By way of general guidance, compound (III) is charged to the reaction vessel in a suitable solvent followed by addition of a suitable base at 20 to 50° C.
  • The reaction is monitored by HPLC (see HPLC condition in Step (1)), and is considered complete when the starting material peak for (III) reaches <5% by area. Depending upon the base and solvent used, the reaction is usually complete in about 1 hour to about 48 hours. Using the preferred conditions, the reaction is usually complete in about 4 to about 18 hours.
  • Solvents for step (3) include alcohols, aqueous alcohols, or aqueous ethers. Preferred solvents for step (3) include, but are not limited to, methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, aqueous methyl alcohol, aqueous. ethyl alcohol, aqueous THF, methyl alcohol-THF, or a combination of two or more of the above solvents. A most preferred solvent is methyl alcohol.
  • Compound (IV) can be obtained by removing the solvent followed by crystallization using an alcohol solvent such as methanol or ethanol. Alternatively, and more preferably, compound (IV) is obtained by precipitation/or crystallization upon partial removal of solvent. The crude product, compound (IV), obtained by a filtration, is then (re)crystallized in an alcohol solvent such as methanol or ethanol.
  • Suitable bases for the deprotection in step (3) include alkaline hydroxides, alkaline carbonates, alkaline alkoxides, basic resin, ammonium hydroxide, ammonium C1-C6 alkoxide, and C3-C6 alkyl primary amines. A preferred suitable base for step (3) includes, but is not limited to, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, ammonium hydroxide, ammonium methoxide, ammonium ethoxide, and ammonium propoxide. Most preferred bases are sodium methoxide, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium methoxide.
  • A preferred amount of base is from 0.02 to 20 equivalents of a compound of Formula (III). A more preferred amount is from 0.05 to 1.2 equivalents. A most preferred amount is 0.05 equivalents.
  • A most preferred reaction temperature is from about 25 to about 35° C.
  • It is understood that one skilled in the art can determine the preferred reaction time of step (1) as dependent on temperature, suitable base, and solvent. Generally, under the preferred conditions, the reaction time is from 4 to 18 hours.
  • The process represented in Scheme 2, which is meant to be illustrative of the present invention and is not meant to be construed as limiting the invention's scope. One skilled in the art understands that other minor products, such as (II-b), (II*-b) and (III-b), can also be generated by the reactions of the present invention.
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00140
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00141
    General Process from 5-Fluorouridine
  • In another particular embodiment of the present invention, the methods of the present invention, by way of example and without limitation, can be further understood by reference to Scheme 3. Scheme 3 provides the general synthetic method for the synthesis of compounds of formulae (II) through (IV) wherein Q is 2-R1CH2C(═O)O-phen-1-yl-, R1CH2—, or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—; X is Cl, Br, or I; R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl; R2 is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, or propyl; R3 is Cl, Br, or I; and R4is R1CH2C(═O)O—.
  • It is to be understood that one skilled in the art of organic synthesis could follow the methods described or exemplified herein to prepare analogues of compounds of Formula (II), (II*), (III), and (IV). It is the object of the present invention to provide a novel and improved process for the synthesis of β-D-D4FC which is useful as an antiviral agent which inhibits the growth or replication of HIV.
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00142
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00143
    Step (1): Haloacylation of Uridine (V).
  • As used herein, the term “haloacylation” refers to a reaction of an acyl halide QC(═O)X with a uridine (V) to form 3′-O-acyl-2′-halo-2′-deoxyuridine (VI*) and/or 2′-O-acyl-3′-halo-3′-deoxyuridine (VI), wherein —O-acyl is —O—C(O)CH2R1. An example is a bromoacetylation of fluorouridine (V) with (AcO)(Me)2C—C(O)Br to form a 3′-O-acetyl-2′-bromo-2′-deoxyuridine (VI*-a) and 2′-O-acetyl-3′-bromo-3′-deoxyuridine (VI-a). (See Scheme 2)
  • Step (1) is conducted by reacting a uridine of Formula (V) with an acyl halide of Formula QC(═O)X in one or more suitable aprotic solvent(s) to form a compound of Formula (VI), a compound of (VI*), or a mixture of compounds of Formula (VI) and (VI*). By way of general guidance, a uridine of Formula (V) is charged to a reaction vessel followed by addition of a suitable polar aprotic solvent(s). A suitable acyl halide of Formula QC(═O)X, such as 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, is then charged to the vessel. After reaction is complete, the temperature of reaction is cooled to a range of about −10 to about 25° C. Then the reaction is quenched by the addition of an aqueous base solution, such as aqueous alkaline hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate solution. The pH of the reaction mixture should be closely monitored during quenching, so that the pH is between 7 to 11 upon completion of addition of the aqueous base solution. Subsequently, intermediates (VI) andior (VI*) are extracted into an organic solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon solvent or an ester solvent. The preferred organic solvent for extracting intermediates (VI) and/or (VI*) is an ester solvent.
  • The reaction is monitored by HPLC, and is considered complete when the starting material peak for compound (V) reaches <5% by area and/or the product peaks reach >70% by area. Depending on the amount of the acyl halide used and the temperature of the reaction, reaction time ranges from about 4 to about 48 hours.
  • Suitable polar aprotic solvents include alkylnitriles, esters, halogenated hydrocarbons, ethers, dialkylformamides, or a combination of two or more suitable polar aprotic solvents. Preferred suitable polar aprotic solvents for step (1) include acetonitrile and methylene chloride. Most preferred solvent is acetonitrile.
  • Suitable acyl halides include, but are not limited to, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl chloride, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl iodide, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxopropoxy)-propanoyl chloride, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxo-propoxy)-propanoyl bromide, 2-methyl-2-(1-oxopropoxy)-propanoyl iodide, 2-chloro-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-bromo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-iodo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester butanoic acid, 2-chloro-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester pentanoic acid, 2-bromo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester pentanoic acid, 2-iodo-1,1-dimethyl-2-oxoethyl ester pentanoic acid, 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl chloride, 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl iodide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl chloride, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl iodide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl chloride, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl bromide, or 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl iodide. More preferred acyl halides include, but are not limited to, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-butanoyl bromide, 2-(acetoxy)-2-ethyl-butanoyl bromide, or 2-(acetoxy)-2-methyl-pentanoyl bromide. A most preferred acyl halide is 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide.
  • A preferred amount of the acyl halide is about 2.0 to about 8.0 equivalents based on one mole of the starting material 5-fluorouridine. A more preferred amount of acyl halide for step (1) is about 3.0 to about 5.0 equivalents.
  • It is preferred to add the acyl halide to the reaction vessel in about 0.5 hours to about 4 hours. A more preferred addition time of acyl halide for step (1) is about 0.5 to about 3 hours, and a most preferred addition time is about 1 hour.
  • A suitable temperature range for the addition of an acyl halide of Step (1) is about 0° C. to about 60° C. A preferred temperature range for the addition of an acyl halide of step (1) is about 10° C. to about 85° C., and most preferred temperature range is about 35° C. to about 60° C.
  • A preferred aqueous base solution is an aqueous solution of NaOH, potassium carbonate or potassium bicarbonate.
  • A preferred pH range for the reaction is from about 7.5 to about 10 upon completion of addition of the aqueous base. A most preferred pH range is in the range of about 8 to about 9.
  • It is understood that the presence of a tetrahaloammonium salt can facilitate this reaction depending on the specific uridine and acyl halide.
  • It is understood that one skilled in the art can determine the preferred reaction time of step (1) as dependent on temperature, acyl halide, and suitable polar aprotic solvent. Generally, under the preferred conditions, the reaction time is from about 15 to about 24 hours.
  • Step (2): Reductive Dehalogenation.
  • This step comprises adding a reducing agent to intermediates (VI) and/or (VI*) from step (1) in one or more suitable polar solvent(s), optionally in the presence of an acid catalyst, to form a compound of Formula (VII). By way of general guidance, compound (VI), compound (VI*), or a mixture of compounds (VI) and/or (VI*), from Step (1) is charged (as a solution or as solids) in a reaction vessel followed by addition of a suitable polar solvent at room temperature. A suitable reducing agent, such as Zn—Cu activated metal, is then added to the vessel. Conditions which can facilitate the reductive elimination include the addition of an acid catalyst, such as a mineral acid or an organic acid. Preferably an acid catalyst is charged to a well-agitated mixture of the solution of. compounds (VI) and/or (VI*) and the reducing agent over a period of about 0.5 h to about 1 hour.
  • The reaction is monitored by HPLC (see HPLC condition in Step (1)) and is considered complete when the starting material peak for (VI) and/or (VI*) is <5% by area. Depending on the reducing agent used and the temperature of the reaction, completion can be reached in about 0.2 h to about 48 hours. Under the preferred conditions, the reaction is complete in about 4 to about 12 hours.
  • The reducing agent, for example Zn—Cu activated metal, which can be in excess, is then removed by filtration, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product (VII) is then dissolved in an ester solvent such as ethyl acetate or isopropyl acetate. A metal complexing reagent is added to the crude product solution. The metal complexing reagent forms a solid with the metal salts which can be removed by filtration. The filtrate containing compound (VII) is then washed with an aqueous solution such as aqueous ammonium and aqueous EDTA. The compound 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydrouridine (VII) can be obtained by removing the solvent.
  • Suitable polar solvents for step (2) are dialkyl-formamide, dialkylacetamide, alcohol, alkylnitrile, ether, ester, or a combination of two or more of the suitable polar solvents. Preferred suitable polar solvents are DMF, methanol, ethanol, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, ethyl acetate, or a combination of two or more of the suitable polar solvents. A most preferred solvent is one consisting of ethyl acetate and methanol. Preferred ratio of ethyl acetate to methanol for step (2) is between 4:1 to 1:1. Most preferred ratio is from 4:1 to 2:1.
  • Reducing agents include, but are limited to, metals such as Zn or Fe, or activated metals such as Zn—Cu couple. Preferred reducing agents for step (2) are Zn and Zn—Cu couple. A most preferred reducing agent is Zn—Cu couple. When Zn—Cu couple is used, the molar ratio of Zn and Cu can be between 99:1 to 1:1. Preferred molar ratio is between 99:1 to 10:1. Most preferred ratio is between 99:1 to 25:1. The preferred amount of a reducing agent is from 1.2 to 20 equivalents. Most preferred amount is from 1.5 to 3.0 equivalents.
  • Preferred acid catalysts for step (2) include, but are not limited to, acetic acid, propionic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, and hydrochloric acid. A most preferred acid is acetic acid.
  • A preferred amount of acid catalyst for step (2) is 0.05 to 2.0 equivalents per mole of compounds (VI) and/or (VI*). A most preferred amount of acid catalyst is from 0.05 to 0.5 equivalents.
  • A preferred room temperature for step (2) is from about 20 to about 40° C. A most preferred temperature is from 25 to 35° C.
  • Suitable metal complexing reagents include potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, and sodium sulfide. The preferred metal complexing reagent is potassium carbonate.
  • Step (3-a,b): Cytidine Formation
  • In this step, the oxo group at the 4-position of the 5-fluoro-uridine moiety of compound (VII) is first converted to a suitable leaving group, Step (3-a), followed by an aminolysis reaction, Step (3-b), to form a 5-fluorocytidine (III).
  • Step (3-a). This step comprises adding intermediate (VII) from Step (2) to a suitable activating agent in the presence of a suitable amine base in a suitable solvent to form a compound of Formula (VIII). By way of general guidance, a suitable activating agent is prepared in a reaction vessel in a suitable solvent in the presence of an amine base. It is understood that part of the preparation can include workup of the solution, for example filtration, before addition of Compound (VII). Compound (VII) is added to the vessel and the reaction is aged for a sufficient amount of time to form an intermediate of formula (VIII). The reaction is carried forward into Step (3-b).
  • Suitable solvents for Step (3-a) include, but are not limited to, halogenated hydrocarbons, ethers or nitriles, wherein nitriles are preferred, of which acetonitrile is most preferred.
  • Suitable amine bases for Step (3-a) are tertiary amines, examples of which include, triethylamine, tributylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N,N-diisopropyl-ethylamine, N,N-dimethylcyclohexylamine, N,N-diethylcyclohexylamine, N,N-dimethyloctylamine, tetramethylethylenediamine, pyridine, N,N-dimethyl-aminopyridine, 1,4-diazabicyclo-[2.2.2]-octane, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene, and 1,5-diazabicyclo-[4.3.0]-non-5-ene. Preferred are triethylamine, tributylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N,N-diisopropyl-ethylamine, pyridine, 1,4-diazabicyclo-[2.2.2]-octane, 1,8-diazabicyclo-[5.4.0]-undec-7-ene, tetramethylethylenediamnine, and N,N-dimethyl-aminopyridine. A more preferred amine base is a trialkylamine, wherein triethylamine is preferred.
  • Suitable activating agents for Step (3-a) are arylsulfonyl chlorides, alkylsulfonyl chlorides and 1,2,4-triazole with phosphorus chlorides; wherein 1,2,4-triazole with phosphorus chlorides are preferred. Phosphorus chloride includes phosphorus oxychloride, diaryl chlorophosphates and dialkyl chlorophosphates. A preferred phosphorus chloride is phosphorus oxychloride or diaryl chlorophosphate. A most preferred phosphorus chloride is phosphorus oxychloride or diphenyl chlorophosphate.
  • In a general example of Step (3-a) a vessel is charged with 1,2,4-triazole in a suitable solvent, and a suitable amine base is added followed by addition of a phosphorus chloride. Preferred temperatures are from −40 to 40° C.; most preferred temperatures are from −10 to 5° C. After addition of the phosphorus chloride, the mixture is agitated at room temperature preferably for 15 minutes to 4 hours, most preferably for 0.50 to 1 hours, after which the reaction is filtered. After filtration, compound (VII) is added to the filtrate and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature. Depending on the amounts of the phosphorus chloride and 1,2,4-triazole used, reaction time ranges from 1 to 48 hours. A preferred amount of a phosphorus chloride is 2 to 8 equivalents based on one mole of compound (VII). A more preferred amount of a phosphorus chloride is 3.0 to 5.0 equivalents. The amounts of 1,2,4-triazole and the base depend on the amount of the phosphorus chloride and the number of chloride in the phosphorus chloride (n). Preferred amounts of 1,2,4-triazole and the base are 1.0 to n to 1.2 to n equivalents based on one mole of the phosphorus chloride. Most preferred amounts of 1,2,4-triazole and the base are 1.0 to n to 1.05 to n equivalents.
  • Step (3-b). This step comprises adding an aminating agent to the solution from Step (3-a) to form a compound of Formula (III). Preferred aminating agents are sources of ammonia, such as, ammonia gas, ammonium hydroxide and ammonium salt such as ammonium carbonate; wherein ammonia gas and ammonium hydroxide are more preferred.
  • Ammonia from a suitable ammonia source is then directly introduced into the above solution at a temperature from 0 to 40° C., preferably from 10 to 25° C. A preferred amount of ammonia is 2.0 to 30.0 equivalents based on one mole of the starting material. Most preferred amount of ammonia is 2.0 to 10.0 equivalents. Depending on the amount of ammonia used, the reaction time ranges from 30 minutes to 24 hours.
  • The product is obtained by removing the solvent followed by chromatography or recrystalization in solvents such as esters, ethers, hydrocarbons, halogenated hydrocarbons; preferably in esters; most preferably in ethyl acetate.
  • Step 3-c: Deprotection.
  • This step comprises adding a suitable base to 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside (III) in a suitable solvent to form a compound of Formula (III). By way of general guidance, compound (III) is charged to the reaction vessel in a suitable solvent followed by addition of a suitable base at 20 to 50° C.
  • The reaction is monitored by HPLC (see HPLC condition in Step (1)), and is considered complete when the starting material peak for (III) reaches <5% by area. Depending upon the base and solvent used, the reaction is usually complete in about 1 hour to about 48 hours. Using the preferred conditions, the reaction is usually complete in about 4 to about 18 hours.
  • Solvents for step (3-c) include alcohols, aqueous alcohols, or aqueous ethers. Preferred solvents for step (3-c) include, but are not limited to, methyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, aqueous methyl alcohol, aqueous ethyl alcohol, aqueous THF, methyl alcohol-THF, or a combination of two or more of the above solvents. A most preferred solvent is methyl alcohol.
  • Compound (III) can be obtained by removing the solvent followed by crystallization using an alcohol solvent such as methanol or ethanol. Alternatively, and more preferably, compound (III) is obtained by precipitation/or crystallization upon partial removal of solvent. The crude product, compound (III), obtained by a filtration, is then (re)crystallized in an alcohol solvent such as methanol or ethanol.
  • Suitable bases for the deprotection in step (3-c) include alkaline hydroxides, alkaline carbonates, alkaline alkoxides, basic resin, ammonium hydroxide, ammonium C1-C6 alkoxide, and C3-C6 alkyl primary amines. A preferred suitable base for step (3-c) includes, but is not limited to, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, ammonium hydroxide, ammonium methoxide, ammonium ethoxide, and ammonium propoxide. Most preferred bases are sodium methoxide, ammonium hydroxide, and ammonium methoxide..
  • A preferred amount of base is from 0.02 to 20 equivalents of a compound of Formula (III). A more preferred amount is from 0.05 to 1.2 equivalents. A most preferred amount is 0.05 equivalents.
  • A most preferred reaction temperature is from about 25° C. to about 35° C.
  • It is understood that one skilled in the art can determine the preferred reaction time of step (3-c) as dependent on temperature, suitable base, and solvent. Generally, under the preferred conditions, the reaction time is from 4 to 18 hours.
  • The process represented in Scheme 4 is meant to be illustrative of the present invention and is not meant to be construed as limiting the invention's scope. One skilled in the art understands that other minor products, such as (VI-b), (VI*-b), (VII-b), and (III-b) can also be generated by the reactions of the present invention.
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00144
    Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00145
    HPLC Conditions:
  • The progress of reaction in Steps (1), (2), (3), and (4) were monitored by HPLC using the following method:
    Column: Eclipse XDB-C18, 25 cm × 4.6 mm I.D.
    Mobile phase: A: 10 mM NaH2PO4 pH 3.6 buffer
    B: HPLC grade acetonitrile
    Gradient: t = 0 min 83% A 17% B
    t = 23 min 20% A 80% B
    t = 30 min 83% A 17% B
    Flow rate: 1.0 mL/min
    Injection volume: 5 microliters
    Stop Time: 30 minutes
    Post Time: 5 minutes
    Oven Temperature: 40° C.
    Detector: UV (220 nm)
  • Sample preparation: dissolve 25 mg of sample (dry solids weight) into a suitable solvent; adjust concentration to approximately 1 mg/ml. The sample concentration can be adjusted to ensure the proper quantitation.
    HPLC Retention times:
    (VI-a)/(VI*-a): 14.5 min (VI-b)/(VI*-b): 10.5 min
    (VII-a): 10.0 min (VII-b):  5.7 min
    (III-a):  7.9 min (III-b):  4.3 min
    (III-a):  2.6 min
  • The following working examples provide a further understanding of the method of the present invention. These examples are of illustrative purpose, and are not meant to limit the scope of the invention. Equivalent, similar, or suitable solvents, reagents or reaction conditions can be substituted for those particular solvents, reagents or reaction conditions described herein without departing from the general scope of the method of synthesis.
    • EXAMPLES
  • Melting points were determined on a Mel-temp II laboratory device and are uncorrected. Nuclear magnetic resonance spectra were recorded on a Bruker 250 and AMX400 400 MHz spectrometers with tetramethylsilane as the internal reference; chemical shifts (δ) are reported in parts per million (ppm), and the signals are described as s (singlet), d (doublet), t (triplet), q (quartet), bs (broad singlet), dd (doublet of doublet), and m (multiplet). UV spectra were obtained on a Beckman DU 650 spectrophotometer. Optical rotations were measured on a Jasco DIP-370 Digital Polarimeter. Mass spectra were measured on a Micromass Inc. Autospec High Resolution double focussing sector (EBE) MS spectrometers. Infrared spectra were recorded on a Nicolet 510 FT-IR spectrometer. Elemental analyses were performed by Atlantic Microlab, Inc., Norcross, Ga. All reactions were monitored using thin layer chromatography on Analtech, 200 mm silica gel GF plates. Dry 1,2-dichloroethane, dichloromethane, acetonitrile and THF were obtained by drying over 4A molecular sieves.
    • Example 1 Preparation of 5′-O-(α-Acetoxyisobutyryl)-3′-O-acetyl-2′-Bromo-2′-deoxy-5-fluoro-cytidine (II*-a) and 5′-O-(α-Acetoxy-isobutyryl)-2′-O-acetyl-3′-bromo-3′-deoxy-5-fluorocytidine (II-a) from 5-fluorocytidine using 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide as the acyl halide and EtOAc/CH3CN as the solvent
  • Step (1). To a suspension of 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 26.1 g, 0.1 mole) in EtOAc (200 mL) and CH3CN (50 mL) was added 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide (84.4 g, 0.4 mol) dropwise at room temperature under N2. The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 24 hours. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. An aqueous KHCO3 solution (˜10%) was added until the mixture reached a pH of about 8.0. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted one time with ethyl acetate. The combined organic solution was washed with brine. Concentration afforded the major products,(II-a) and (II*-a), and the minor products, (II-b) and (II*-b), as a solid in a ratio of 12.6:1 (43.6 g, 88%).
  • Analytical samples of the mixtures of products were separated by HPLC. A mixture of compounds (II-a) and (II*-a) was isolated as an amorphous solid: 1H NMR (CDCl3) 1.58 (6H, s), 2.06 (3H, s), 2.17 (3H, s), 4.30-4.80 (4H, m), 5.33 and 5.45 (1H, s), 5.86 and 5.98 (1H, s), 7.98 and 8.04 (1H, d, J=6.0 Hz); 19F NMR (CDCl3) −76.47 (s); 19F NMR (CDCl3) −76.47 (s); MS (ESI) m/z, [M+H]+, 496. A mixture of minor products, compounds of Formula (II-b) and (II*-b), was isolated as an amorphous solid. HPLC retention time for (II-a) and (II*-a) is 25.8 minutes and 22.5 minutes for (II-b) and (II*-b). 1H NMR (CDCl3) 2.14 (3H, s), 2.16 (3H, s), 4.30-4.70 (4H, m), 5.39 and 5.48 (1H, s), 5.86 and 5.98 (1H, s), 7.96 and 8.02 (1H, d, J=6.0 Hz); 19F NMR (CDCl3) −76.47 (s); MS (ESI) m/z, [M+H]+, 410.
    • Example 2 Preparation of (II-a) and (II*a) from 5-fluoro-cytidine using 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide as the acyl halide and CH3CN as the solvent
  • Step (1). To a suspension of 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 5.2 g, 0.02 mole) in CH3CN (40 mL) was added 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide (16.7 g, 0.08 mol) dropwise at room temperature under N3. The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (80 mL) and then cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. An aqueous KHCO3 solution (˜10%) was added until the mixture reached a pH of about 8.0. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted two times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic solution was washed with brine. Concentration afforded the major products, (II-a) and (II*-a), and the minor products, (II-b) and (II*-b), as a solid in a ratio of 8.7:1 (6.8 g, 69%).
    • Example 3 Preparalion (II-a) and (II*-a) from 5-fluorocytidine using 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide as the acyl halide and CH2Cl2 as the solvent, in the presence of Et4NBr
  • Step (1). To a suspension of 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 2.61 g, 0.01 mole) and Et4NBr (6.3 g, 0.03 mol)in CH2CH2 (20 mL) was added 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide dropwise (9.3 g, 0.03 mol) at room temperature under N2. The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. An aqueous KHCO3 solution (˜10%) was added until the mixture reached a pH of about 8.0. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted one time with CH2Cl2. The combined organic solution was washed with brine. Concentration afforded the major products, (II-a) and (II*-a), and the minor products, (II-b) and (II*-b), as a solid in a ratio of 4.3:1 (4.17 g, 84%).
    • Example 4 Preparation of (II-a) and (II*-a) from 5-fluoro-cytidine using 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide as the acyl halide and EtOAc as the solvent, in the presence of Et4NBr at 50° C.
  • Step (1). To a suspension of 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 2.61 g, 0.01 mole) and Et4NBr (6.3 g, 0.03 mol) in EtOAc (20 mL) was added α-acetoxy-isobutyryl bromide dropwise (6.3 g, 0.03 mol) at 50° C. under N2. The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at 50° C. for 22 hours. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. An aqueous KHCO3 solution (˜10%) was added until the mixture reached a pH of about 8.0. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted one time with ethyl acetate. The combined organic solution was washed with brine. Concentration afforded the major products, (II-a) and (II*-a), and the minor products, (II-b) and (II*-b), as a solid in a ratio of 2.3:1 (3.43 g, 69%).
    • Example 5 Preparation of (II-a) and (II*a) from 5-fluoro-cytidine using 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide as the acyl halide and CH3CN as the solvent at 50° C.
  • Step (1). To a suspension of 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 2.61 g, 0.01 mole) in CH3CN (20 mL) was added 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide (8.4 g, 0.04 mol) dropwise at 50° C. under N2. The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at 50° C. for 6 hours. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (40 mL) and then cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. An aqueous KHCO3 solution (˜10%) was added until the mixture reached a pH of about 8.0. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted two times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic solution was washed with brine. Concentration afforded the major products, (II-a) and (II*-a), and the minor products, (II-b) and (II*-b), as a solid in a ratio of 9.3:1(3.2 g, 66%).
    • Example 6 Preparation of (II-a) and (II*-a) from 5-fluoro-cytidine using 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide as the acyl halide and EtOAc/CH3CN as the solvent in a kilogram scale reaction
  • Step (1). A 50 L reactor was purged with N2 for 10 minutes. To this reactor was charged 5-fluorocytidine ((I), 1.40 kg, 5.36 mole), EtOAc (10.8 L), and CH3CN (2.66 l) to form a slurry. The slurry was cooled to 20° C., and under vigorous agitation, 2-acetoxy-2-methyl-propionyl bromide (4.51 kg, 21.44 mol) was added over 1 h so that the temperature did not exceed 35° C. After addition, the resulting reaction mixture was agitated at room temperature for 20 hours. HPLC showed the conversion was over 99%. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. A solution of KHCO3 (3.22 kg, 32.2 mol) in water (16.1 L) was added. After addition, the mixture was vigorously agitated. for 15 minutes and then the organic layer was separated from the aqueous layer. The aqueous layer was extracted one time with ethyl acetate (5.64 L), and the combined organic solution was washed with brine (7.6 L). HPLC analysis provided a solution yield of 86% with a ratio of products (II-a) and (II*-a) to (II-b) and (II*-b) of 12:1.
    • Example 7 Preparation of 5′-O-(α-Acetoxyisobutyryl)-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluoro-cytidine (III-a) using Zn—Cu as the reducing agent and MeOH/EtOAc as the solvent
  • Step (2). Under N2(g) atmosphere, the mixture of products from Step (1), Example 1, (43.6 g, 0.088 mol) was dissolved in a mixed solvent of ethyl acetate (300 mL) and MeOH (100 mL). The Zn—Cu couple reducing agent, prepared as described below, was added. Acetic acid (2.4 mL, 0.044 mol) was introduced dropwise under vigorous agitation. The resulting reaction mixture was agitated for additional 7 hours at room temperature. The excess Zn—Cu couple was removed by filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in 300 mL of EtOAc. To this EtOAc solution was added a K2CO3 (18.2 g, 0.132 mol) solution in 20 mL of water. The white solid was removed by filtration. The filtrate was washed with aqueous ammonia solution and brine, dried over Na2SO4. Removing the solvent gave 24.4 g (78%) of mixture of a major product (III-a) and a minor product, a compound of Formula (III-b) in a ratio of 20:1.
  • Preparation of Zn—Cu couple reducing agent: Zinc powder (14.3 g, 0.22 mol) and water (100 mL) were charged to a reaction vessel under N2. A solution of CuSO4.H4O (2.84 g, 0.012 mol) in 10 niL of water was added slowly. After addition, the mixture was stirred for additional 0.25 hours at room temperature. The Zn—Cu couple was collected by filtration followed by washing with water and MeOH. The wet cake was used immediately as described above.
  • Analytical sample of (III-a) as a white solid was obtained by HPLC separation. The HPLC retention time for (III-a) is 22.0 minutes: mp 247-249° C.; 1H NMR (CDCl3) 1.50 (3H, s), 1.52 (3H, s), 1.98 (3H, s), 4.17 (1H, dd, J=12.3 and 2.7 Hz), 4.51 (1H, dd, J=12.5 and 3.6 Hz), 5.04 (1H, m), 5.94 (1H, m), 6.15 (1H, m), 6.95 (1H, m), 7.59 (1H, J=6.2 Hz), 8.95 (1H, br); 19F NMR (CDCl3) ˜167.7 (s); MS (ESI, negative mode) m/z [M−H]−, 354. Anal. Calcd for C15H18FN3O6: C, 50.70; H, 5.116; N,11.83. Found: C, 50.63; H, 5.12; N, 11.65. The minor product was an amorphous solid, a compound of Formula (III-b) having an HPLC retention time of 18.2 minutes. 1H NMR (CDCl3) 2.20 (3H, s), 4.20 (1H, dd, J=12.1 and 2.8 Hz), 4.50 (1H, dd, J=12.1 and 3.4 Hz), 5.08 (1H, m), 5.96 (1H, m), 6.12 (1H, m), 6.90 (1H, m), 7.48 (1H, J=6.1 Hz), 8.85 (1H, br); 19F NMR (CDCl3) −167.3 (s); MS (ESI, negative mode) m/z, [M−H]−, 268.
    • Example 8 Preparation of (III-a) using Zn—Cu Couple as the Reducing Agent and DMF as the Solvent
  • Step (2). The mixture of products of step (1) (8.9 g, 0.018 mol) was dissolved in DMF solvent (100 mL) under N2. The Zn—Cu couple (6 g, 0.09 mol), prepared in the way as described in Example 7, was added. Acetic acid (0.8 mL, 0.015 mol) was introduced dropwise under vigorous agitation. The resulting reaction mixture was agitated for 3 hours at room temperature. The excess Zn—Cu couple was removed by filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in 100 mL of EtOAc. To this EtOAc solution was added a K2CO3 (4.5 g, 0.033 mol) solution in 5 mL of water. The white solid was removed by filtration. The filtrate was washed with aqueous ammonia solution and brine, dried over Na2SO4. Removing the solvent gave 5.3 g (85%) of mixture of a major product (III-a) and a minor product, a compound of Formula (III-b) in a ratio of 10:1.
    • Example 9 Preparation of 5′-O-(α-Acetoxyisobutyryl)-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluoro-cytidine (III-a) using Zn—Cu couple as the reducing agent and MeOH/EtOAc as the solvent
  • Step (2). The mixture of products of Step (1)(2.79 g, 0.0056 mol) was dissolved in a mixed solvent of ethyl acetate (21 mL) and MeOH (7 mL). The Zn—Cu couple reducing agent (1.8 g, 0.028 mol), prepared in the way as described in example 7, was added under N2. Acetic acid (0.31 mL, 0.0056 mol) was introduced dropwise under vigorous agitation. The resulting reaction mixture was agitated for an additional 5 hours at room temperature. The excess Zn—Cu couple was removed by filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in 30 mL of EtOAc. To this EtOAc solution was added a K2CO3 (1.5 g, 0.01 1 mol) solution in 2 mL of water. The white solid was removed by filtration. The filtrate was washed with aqueous ammonia solution and brine, dried over Na2SO4. Removing the solvent gave 1.67 g (84%) of mixture of a major product (III-a) and a minor product, a compound of Formula (III-b) in a ratio of 20:1.
    • Example 10 Preparation of 5′-O-(α-Acetoxyisobutyryl)-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluoro-cytidine (III-a) in Kilogram Scale Using Zn—Cu Couple as the Reducing Agent and MeOH/EtOAc as the Solvent
  • Step (2). Freshly prepared Zn—Cu couple was charged to a 50 L reactor that was purged with N2. See below for preparation of Zn—Cu couple. Methanol (7.4 L) and a solution of the mixture of the products from step (1), Example 6 (22 L, 2.61 mol) were charged to the vessel. Subsequently, AcOH (0.14 L, 2.8 mol) was added to the vessel over 25 minutes under vigorous agitation. The temperature rose slowly to 31° C. After addition of AcOH, the mixture was agitated at room temperature until HPLC analysis showed the disappearance of the starting materials (˜3 h). The excess Zn—Cu was removed by filtration through a bed of Celite and the cake was washed with 3.85 L MeOH. Methanol was removed from the filtrate solution under reduced pressure at a temperature of <30° C. to give a mixture of products in EtOAc (20 L, <1% v/v of MeOH). A solution of K2CO3 (1.16 Kg, 8.4 mol) in 1.1 L water was added to the EtOAc solution under vigorous agitation for 15 minutes, and a white solid was formed during the 15 minutes agitation period. The white solid was removed by filtration through a bed of Celite and then rinsed with 6.33 L of EtOAc. The filtrate was then washed with 10 N NH4OH (3.33 L) followed by brine (3.03 L×2). The EtOAc solvent was removed under reduced pressure at a temperature of <30° C., and MeOH was added back to replace the removed EtOAc. The final volume of the product solution was 12 L of MeOH with <1% of EtOAc (by volume). HPLC analysis showed a solution yield of 67%.
  • Preparation of Zn—Cu couple. A 12 L vessel was purged with N2 for 15 minutes. Water (6.3 L) and Zn powder (0.91 Kg, 14.0 mol) were charged to this vessel. A solution of CuSO4.5H2O (0.17 Kg, 0.79 mol) in 0.69 L of water was added to the vessel within 15 minutes. The resulting black suspension was agitated at room temperature for 15 minutes, and then the solid was collected by filtration. The cake was washed three times with a total volume of 8.25 L water and then three times with a total volume of 8.25 L methanol and was used immediately used.
    • Example 11 Preparation of2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluoro-cytidine (IV) using NaOMe as the Base
  • Step (3). Products (III-a) and (III-b) of Example 7, (24.5 g, 0.069 mol), were dissolved in 200 mL of MeOH. To this solution was introduced a 25 wt % NaOMe solution (0.8 mL, 0.003 mol). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure to half of the original volume. The white solid was collected by filtration (13.0 g, 83%). The HPLC retention time for (IV-a) is 8.3 minutes. 1H NMR (CD3OD) 3.75 (2H, m); 4.85 (1H, m); 5.90 (1H, m); 6.32 (1H, m) 6.92 (1H, m); 8.14(1H, d, J=6.6 Hz). 19F NMR (CD3OD) −168.90 (d, J=0.016); mp 175-176° C.; MS (ESI, negative mode) m/z, [M−H]−, 226.2. Anal. Calcd for C9H10FN3O3: C, 47.58; H, 4.45; N, 18.50. Found: C, 47.66; H, 4.32; N, 18.50.
    • Example 12 Preparation of (IV) using NH3 as the Base
  • Step (3). Products (III-a) and (III-b) (2.85 g, 0.008 mol) were dissolved in an ammonia-saturated MeOH solution (25 mL, ˜36% Wt. NH3 in MeOH) the resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was slurried with 10 mL of MeOH. The white solid was collected by filtration (1.37 g, 75%).
    • Example 13 Preparation of (IV) Using Dowex® OH Ion-Exchange Resin as yhe Base
  • Step (3). Products (III-a) and (III-b) (4.8 g, 0.013 mol), were dissolved 50 mL of MeOH. To this solution was added Dowex® OH ion-exchange resin (4.8 g) prepared as described below. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. The Dowex® OH ion-exchange resin was filtered off and washed completely with MeOH. The MeOH solution was then concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of ˜20 mL. The white solid was collected by filtration (1.65 g, 54%).
  • Preparation of Dowex® OH ion-exchange resin: Dowex® 1X2-200 ion-exchange resin (20 g) was suspended in 20 mL of 50% wt NaOH solution and the suspension was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The resin was collected by filtration and then washed with MeOH.
    • Example 14 Preparation of (IV) in Kilogram Scale from (III-a) and (III-b) using NaOMe as the Base
  • Step (3). To a 50 L reactor were charged a solution of the products (III-a) and (III-b) in MeOH from Step 2, Example 10 (24 L, 7.08 mol) and 25 wt % MeONa in MeOH (110 mL, 0.48 mol). The solution was agitated at room temperature for 12 hours, and then concentrated under reduced pressure at a temperature of <30° C. to a volume of 12 L. The resulting product slurry was cooled to 0° C. to 5° C. and stirred for 2 hours. The product was then collected by filtration (1.46 Kg, 91%).
    • Example 15 Preparation of 5′-O-(α-Acetoxyisobutyryl)-3′-O-acetyl-2′-Bromo-2′-deoxy-5-fluoro-uridine (II*-a) and 5′-O-(α-Acetoxy-isobutyryl)-2′-O-acetyl-3′-bromo-3′-deoxy-5-fluorouridine (II-a) From 5-fluorouridine Using α-acetoxyisobutyryl Bromide as the Acyl Halide and CH3CN as the Solvent
  • Step (1). To a suspension of 5-fluorouridine ((I), 0.5 g, 1.91 mmol) in CH3CN (40 mL) was added α-acetoxyisobutyryl bromide (1.6 g, 7.64 mmol) dropwise at room temperature under N2. The resulting reaction mixture was then heated to reflux for 1 hour. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. Saturated NaHCO3 solution (40 mL) was added. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×3) and the EtOAc solution was washed with brine and then dried over Na2SO4. Concentration afforded the major products (II-a) and (II*-a) and the minor products, (II-b) and (II*-b) as a solid in a ratio of 5:1 (780 mg, 83%). The mixture of products was used directly in step (2).
  • Analytical samples of the mixtures of products were separated by HPLC. A mixture of compounds (II-a) and (II*-a) was isolated as an amorphous solid: 1H NMR (CDCl3) 1.49 (6H, s), 2.16 (3H, s), 2.20 (3H, s), 4.25-4.90 (4H, m), 5.34 and 5.48 (1H, s), 5.79 and 5.90 (1H, s), 7.96 and 8.14 (1H, d, J=6.0 Hz); 19F NMR (CDCl3) −80.7 (s); MS (ESI) m/z, [M+H]+, 497.
  • A mixture of minor products (II-b) or (II*-b) was isolated as an amorphous solid: 1H NMR (CDCl3) 2.20 (3H, s), 2.15 (3H, s), 4.20-4.70 (4H, m), 5.38 and 5.42 (1H, s), 5.90 and 5.99 (1H, s), 7.99 and 8.11 (1H, d, J=6.0 Hz); 19F NMR (CDCl3) −80.7 (s); MS (ESI) m/z, [M+H]+, 411.
    • Example 16 Preparation of (VI*-a) and (VI-a) from 5-fluorouridine using α-acetoxyisobutyryl bromide as the acyl halide and CH3CN as the Solvent in the Presence of tetraethylammonium bromide
  • Step (1). To a suspension of 5-fluorouridine ((V), 1.31 g, 5.0 mmol) and tetraethylammonium bromide (1.05 g, 5.0 mmol) in CH3CN (15 mL) was added α-acetoxyisobutyryl bromide (2.9 mL, 20 mmol) dropwise at room temperature under N2. The resulting reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 4 days. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. Saturated NaHCO3 solution was added until the pH of the mixture was ˜8.0. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×3) and the EtOAc solution was washed with brine and then dried over Na2SO4. Concentration afforded the major products (VI-a) and (VI*-a) and the minor products, (VI-b) and (VI*-b) as an amorphous solid in a ratio of 3.6:1 (2.36 g, 95.3%).
    • Example 17 Preparation of (VI*-a) and (VI-a) from 5-fluorouridine using α-acetoxyisobutyryl bromide as the acyl halide and CH3CN as the Solvent in the Presence of tetraethylammonium bromide
  • Step (1). To a suspension of 5-fluorouridine ((V), 1.31 g, 5.0 mmol) and tetraethylammonium bromide (1.05 G, 5.0 mmol) in CH3CN (15 mL) was added α-acetoxyisobutyryl bromide (2.9 mL, 20 mmol) dropwise at room temperature under N2. The resulting reaction mixture was then heated at 45° C. overnight. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. Saturated NaHCO3 solution was added until the pH of the mixture was ˜8.0. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×3) and the EtOAc solution was washed with brine and then dried over Na2SO4. Concentration afforded the major products (VI-a) and (VI*-a) and the minor products, (VI-b) and (VI*-b) as an amorphous solid in a ratio of 3.9:1 (2.34 g, 94.5%).
    • Example 18 Preparation of (VI*-a) and (VI-a) From 5-fluorouridine using α-acetoxyisobutyryl bromide as the acyl halide and CH3CN as the Solvent
  • Step (1). To a suspension of 5-fluorouridine ((V), 1.31 g, 5.0 mrnol) in CH3CN (15 mL) was added α-acetoxyisobutyryl bromide (2.9 mL, 20 mmol) dropwise at room temperature under N2. The resulting reaction mixture was then heated at 45° C. overnight. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. Saturated NaHCO3 solution was added until the pH of the mixture was ˜8.0. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×3) and the EtOAc solution was washed with brine and then dried over Na2SO4. Concentration afforded the major products (VI-a) and (VI*-a) and the minor products, (VI-b) and (VI*-b) as an amorphous solid in a ratio of 2.4:1 (2.4 g, 99%).
    • Example 19 Preparation of (VI*-a) and (VI-a) From 5-fluorouridine using α-acetoxyisobutyryl bromide as the acyl halide and CH3CN and EtOAc as the Solvent
  • Step (1). To a suspension of 5-fluorouridine ((V), 0.67 g, 2.5 mmol) in CH3CN (4 mL) and EtOAc (4 mL) was added α-acetoxyisobutyryl bromide (1.5 mL, 10 mmol) dropwise at room temperature under N2. The resulting reaction mixture was then heated at 45° C. overnight. The mixture was cooled to about 4° C. in an ice-water bath. Saturated NaHCO3 solution was added until the pH of the mixture was ˜8.0. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×3) and the EtOAc solution was washed with brine and then dried over Na2SO4. Concentration afforded a mixture of (VI-a), (VI*-a) and (VI-b), (VI -b) as an amorphous solid in a ratio of 1:1 (1.2 g, 97%).
    • Example 20 Preparation of 5′-O-(α-Acetoxyisobutyryl)-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluoro-uridine (VII-a) using Zn as the Reducing Agent and DMF as the Solvent
  • Step (2). Under a N2(g) atmosphere, the mixture of products from Step (1), Example 1, (2.5 g, 5.0 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (150 mL). Zn (10 g, 154 mmol) was added. Acetic acid (2.5 mL, 45 mmol) was introduced dropwise under vigorous agitation. The resulting reaction mixture was agitated for 2 hours at room temperature. The excess Zn was removed by filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in 50 mL of EtOAc and, washed with 10 M NH4OH and brine, dried over Na2SO4. Concentration afforded the product as an amorphous solid (1.34 g, 76%). An analytical sample was obtained by crystallization from EtOAc/Hexane to provide a white solid; [α]D−45.5 (c, 0.83, CHCl3, 25° C.); mp 154-156° C.; 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.53 (3H, s), 1.56 (3H, s), 2.02 (3H, s), 4.22 (1H, dd, J=12.5, 3.0 Hz), 4.54 (1H, dd, J=12.5, 3.0 Hz), 5.07 (1H, m), 5.88 (1H, m), 6.29 (1H, m), 6.99 (1H, m), 7.61 (1H, J=5.5 Hz), 9.35 (1H, br); 19F NMR (CDCl3) δ−163.7 (s); MS (ESI) m/z (relative intensity %) 379 ([M+Na]+, 100. Anal. Calcd for C15H17FN2O7: C, 50.56; H, 4.819; N, 7.86. Found: C, 50.64; H, 4.77; N, 7.80.
    • Example 21 Preparation of 5′-O-(α-Acetoxyisobutyryl)-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluoro-uridine (VII-a) using Zn as the Reducing Agent and EtOAc and MeOH as the Solvent
  • Step (2). Under a N2(g) atmosphere, the mixture of products from Step (1), Example 1, (2.5 g, 5.0 mmol) was dissolved in EtOAc (30 mL) and MeOH (10 mL). Zn (0.8 g, 12.5 mmol) was added. Acetic acid (0.14 mL, 2.5 mmol) was introduced dropwise under vigorous agitation. The resulting reaction rnixture was agitated for 5 hours at room temperature. The excess Zn was removed by filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in 50 mL of EtOAc and washed with 10 M NH4OH and brine, dried over Na2SO4. Concentration afforded the product as an amorphous solid (1.53 g, 87%).
    • Example 22 Preparation of 5′-O-(α-Acetoxyisobutyryl)-2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluoro-cytidine (III-a)
  • Step (3-a). POCl3 (0.43 mL, 4.62 mmol) was added to a solution of 1,2,4-triazole (1.06 g, 18.7 mmol) and TEA (2.1 mL, 18.7 mmol) in CH3CN (15 mL) at 0° C. After addition, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hrs. The solid was filtered off and the filtrate mixed with compounds (VII-a) and (VII-b) from Step 2, Example 6 (500 mg, 1.4 mmol). The solution was stirred at room temperature for 4 hrs, and then cooled in ice-water bath.
  • Step (3-b). Excess NH3 (g) was bubbled into the mixture slowly for 0.5 hr. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was partitioned between water (20 mL) and CH2Cl2 (30 mL), and the CH2Cl2 solution was dried over Na2SO4. Concentration gave (III-a) as the major product. Analytical sample of (III-a) was obtained by chromatograph separation (CH2Cl2/MeOH) to afford a white solid (300 mg, 60%): mp 247-249° C.; 1H NMR (CDCl3) 1.50 (3H, s), 1.52 (3H, s), 1.98 (3H, s), 4.17 (1H, dd, J=12.3 and 2.7. Hz), 4.51 (1H, dd, J=12.5 and 3.6 Hz), 5.04 (1H, m), 5.94 (1H, m), 6.15 (1H, m), 6.95 (1H, m), 7.59 (1H, J=6.2 Hz), 8.95 (1H, br); 19F NMR (CDCl3) −167.7 (s); MS (ESI, negative mode) m/z [M−H]−, 354. Anal. Calcd for C15H18FN3O6: C, 50.70; H, 5.116; N,11.83. Found: C,50.63; H, 5.12; N, 11.65.
    • Example 23 Preparation of 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluoro-cytidine (III) from (III-b) and (III-a) Using NaOMe as The Base
  • Step (3-c). Compounds (III-b) and (III-a) (24.5 g, 0.069 mol), were dissolved in 200 mL of MeOH. To this solution was introduced a 25 wt % NaOMe solution (0.8 mL, 0.003 mol). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure to half of the original volume. The white solid was collected by filtration (13.0 g, 83%): mp 175-176° C.; 1H NMR (CD3OD) 3.75 (2H, m); 4.85 (1H, m); 5.90 (1H, m); 6.32 (1H, m) 6.92 (1H, m); 8.14(1H, d, J=6.6 Hz). 19F NMR (CD3OD) −168.90 (d, J=0.016); MS (ESI, negative mode) m/z, [M−H]−, 226.2. Anal. Calcd for C9H10FN3O3: C, 47.58; H, 4.45; N, 18.50. Found: C, 47.66; H, 4.32; N, 18.50.
    • Example 24 Preparation of (III) from (III-b) and (III-a) using NH3 as the Base
  • Step (3-c). Products (III-b) and (III-a) (2.85 g, 0.008 mol), were dissolved in an ammonia-saturated MeOH solution (25 mL, ˜36% Wt. NH3 in MeOH) the resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was slurried with 10 mL of MeOH. The white solid was collected by filtration (1.37 g, 75%).
    • Example 25 Preparation of (III) from (III-b) and (III-a) using Dowex-OH as the Base
  • Step (3-c). Products (III-b) and (III-a) (4.8 g, 0.013 mol), were dissolved 50 mL of MeOH. To this solution was added Dowex-OH resin (4.8 g), whose preparation was described below. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. The Dowex resin was filtered off and washed completely with MeOH. The MeOH solution was then concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of ˜20 mL. The white solid was collected by filtration (1.65 g, 54%).
  • Preparation of Dowex-OH resin: Dowex-Cl resin (20 g) was suspended in 20 mL of 50% wt NaOH solution and the suspension was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The resin was collected by filtration and then washed with MeOH.
  • Although the present invention has been described with respect to a specific embodiment, the details of the embodiment is not to be construed as limitations. For instance, while this disclosure uses β-D-D4FC as an illustrative model reaction, it should be understood that any β-D or β-L D4 or D2 nucleoside can be made according to the present invention, and is not limited to this specific embodiment. Various equivalents, changes and modification can be made without departing from the spirit and the scope of this invention, and it is understood that such equivalent embodiments are part of this invention. The present invention can be embodied in other specific forms without departing from the spirit or essential attributes thereof and, accordingly, reference should be made to the appended claims as further indicating the scope of the invention.

Claims (14)

1-46. (canceled)
47. A compound of Formula (VI) or (VI*):
Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00146
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
Q is R1CH2— or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl;
R2 is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, and propyl;
R3 is Cl, Br, or IV; and
R4 is R1CH2C(═O)O—.
48. A compound of claim 47 of Formula (VI-a) or (VI*-a):
Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00147
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
49. A compound of Formula (VII):
Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00148
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
Q is R1CH2— or R1CH2C(═O)OC(R2)2—;
R1 is H or C1-C6 alkyl; and
R2 is independently selected from methyl, ethyl, and propyl.
50. A compound of claim 49 of Formula (VII-a):
Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00149
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
51. A process for the preparation of a β-D- and β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydronucleoside comprising:
a) activating a compound of structure (1)
Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00150
wherein B is a pyrimidine or purine base; and
Y is O, S or CH2;
with an acyl halide of the formula X—C(═O)R1, X—C(═O)C(R1)2OC(═O)R1 or X—C(═O)phenylC(═O)OR1;
wherein X is a halogen (F, Cl, Br or I), and
each R1 is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkyl, aryl or phenyl;
to form a compound of structure (2)
Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00151
wherein R is R1, —C(R1)2OC(═O)R1 or -phenylC(═O)OR1; and
at least one R is halogen (F, Cl, Br or I), and at least one R is an acyl of the formula —OC(═O)R1; and then
b) reducing the compound of structure (2) with a reducing agent to form a 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside of structure (3)
Figure US20050250946A1-20051110-C00152
c) optionally deprotecting the nucleoside if necessary.
52. The process of claim 51, wherein B is 5-fluorouracil or 5-fluorocytosine.
53. The process of claim 51, wherein Y is 0.
54. The process of claim 51, wherein the β-D- and β-L-2α,3α-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside is D4FC.
55. The process of claim 51, wherein the β-D- and β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside is β-D-D4FC.
56. The process of claim 51, wherein the β-D- and β-L-2β,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside is β-D-D4FC.
57. The process of claim 51, further comprising reducing the β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside into a β-D or β-L-2′ or 3′-deoxyribo-nucleoside.
58. The process of claim 51, further comprising converting the β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside bearing a different nucleobase.
59. The process of claim 58, wherein the β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-nucleoside is β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorouridine which is converted to a β-D or β-L-2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydro-5-fluorocytidine.
US11/182,862 2001-03-01 2005-07-18 Method for the synthesis of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides Abandoned US20050250946A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/182,862 US20050250946A1 (en) 2001-03-01 2005-07-18 Method for the synthesis of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US27243401P 2001-03-01 2001-03-01
US27244101P 2001-03-01 2001-03-01
US10/087,112 US6927291B2 (en) 2001-03-01 2002-03-01 Method for the synthesis of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydronucleosides
US11/182,862 US20050250946A1 (en) 2001-03-01 2005-07-18 Method for the synthesis of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/087,112 Division US6927291B2 (en) 2001-03-01 2002-03-01 Method for the synthesis of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydronucleosides

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20050250946A1 true US20050250946A1 (en) 2005-11-10

Family

ID=26955519

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/087,112 Expired - Lifetime US6927291B2 (en) 2001-03-01 2002-03-01 Method for the synthesis of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydronucleosides
US11/182,862 Abandoned US20050250946A1 (en) 2001-03-01 2005-07-18 Method for the synthesis of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/087,112 Expired - Lifetime US6927291B2 (en) 2001-03-01 2002-03-01 Method for the synthesis of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydronucleosides

Country Status (13)

Country Link
US (2) US6927291B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1363927A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2004527504A (en)
KR (1) KR20030092006A (en)
CN (1) CN1505635A (en)
AU (1) AU2002255654B2 (en)
BR (1) BR0207746A (en)
CA (1) CA2439836A1 (en)
IL (1) IL157478A0 (en)
MX (1) MXPA03007853A (en)
NZ (1) NZ540956A (en)
RU (1) RU2003129164A (en)
WO (1) WO2002070533A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (65)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
BR0110023A (en) 2000-04-13 2003-12-30 Pharmasset Ltd Substituted 3'-or-2 'nucleoside derivatives for treatment of hepatitis virus infections
MY164523A (en) 2000-05-23 2017-12-29 Univ Degli Studi Cagliari Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis c virus
JP5230052B2 (en) 2000-05-26 2013-07-10 イデニクス（ケイマン）リミテツド Methods and compositions for the treatment of flaviviruses and pestiviruses
WO2004002422A2 (en) * 2002-06-28 2004-01-08 Idenix (Cayman) Limited 2’-c-methyl-3’-o-l-valine ester ribofuranosyl cytidine for treatment of flaviviridae infections
US7608600B2 (en) * 2002-06-28 2009-10-27 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified 2′ and 3′-nucleoside prodrugs for treating Flaviviridae infections
CA2494340C (en) 2002-08-01 2012-01-24 Pharmasset Inc. Compounds with the bicyclo[4.2.1]nonane system for the treatment of flaviviridae infections
CA2506129C (en) 2002-11-15 2015-02-17 Idenix (Cayman) Limited 2'-branched nucleosides and flaviviridae mutation
WO2005003147A2 (en) 2003-05-30 2005-01-13 Pharmasset, Inc. Modified fluorinated nucleoside analogues
WO2007075876A2 (en) 2005-12-23 2007-07-05 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Process for preparing a synthetic intermediate for preparation of branched nucleosides
EP1973876A2 (en) * 2006-01-13 2008-10-01 Wyeth Sulfonyl substituted 1h-indoles as ligands for the 5-hydroxytryptamine receptors
US7951789B2 (en) 2006-12-28 2011-05-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
WO2008106167A1 (en) * 2007-02-28 2008-09-04 Conatus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Combination therapy comprising matrix metalloproteinase inhibitors and caspase inhibitors for the treatment of liver diseases
ATE525068T1 (en) 2007-02-28 2011-10-15 Conatus Pharmaceuticals Inc METHOD FOR TREATING CHRONIC VIRAL HEPATITIS C USING RO 113-0830
US20100130439A1 (en) * 2007-04-26 2010-05-27 Romesberg Floyd E Genomic mutation inhibitors that inhibit y family dna polymerases
EP2476690A1 (en) 2008-07-02 2012-07-18 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US8193372B2 (en) 2009-03-04 2012-06-05 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Phosphothiophene and phosphothiazole HCV polymerase inhibitors
TW201117812A (en) 2009-08-05 2011-06-01 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors
US20110117055A1 (en) 2009-11-19 2011-05-19 Macdonald James E Methods of Treating Hepatitis C Virus with Oxoacetamide Compounds
MX2012006877A (en) 2009-12-18 2012-08-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc 5,5-fused arylene or heteroarylene hepatitis c virus inhibitors.
WO2011123586A1 (en) 2010-04-01 2011-10-06 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
WO2012080050A1 (en) 2010-12-14 2012-06-21 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Solid forms of a phenoxybenzenesulfonyl compound
WO2012109398A1 (en) 2011-02-10 2012-08-16 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Macrocyclic serine protease inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and their use for treating hcv infections
EP2691409B1 (en) 2011-03-31 2018-02-21 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US20120252721A1 (en) 2011-03-31 2012-10-04 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for treating drug-resistant hepatitis c virus infection with a 5,5-fused arylene or heteroarylene hepatitis c virus inhibitor
US20140249105A1 (en) * 2011-07-25 2014-09-04 Diverchim Novel ceramide analogues, processes for preparing same and uses thereof
WO2013039855A1 (en) 2011-09-12 2013-03-21 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
US9403863B2 (en) 2011-09-12 2016-08-02 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Substituted carbonyloxymethylphosphoramidate compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
EP2768838A1 (en) 2011-10-14 2014-08-27 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted 3',5'-cyclic phosphates of purine nucleotide compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
CA3131037A1 (en) 2011-11-30 2013-06-06 Emory University Antiviral jak inhibitors useful in treating or preventing retroviral and other viral infections
WO2013133927A1 (en) 2012-02-13 2013-09-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions of 2'-c-methyl-guanosine, 5'-[2-[(3-hydroxy-2,2-dimethyl-1-oxopropyl)thio]ethyl n-(phenylmethyl)phosphoramidate]
US9109001B2 (en) 2012-05-22 2015-08-18 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3′,5′-cyclic phosphoramidate prodrugs for HCV infection
WO2013177195A1 (en) 2012-05-22 2013-11-28 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3',5'-cyclic phosphate prodrugs for hcv infection
AU2013266393B2 (en) 2012-05-22 2017-09-28 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc D-amino acid compounds for liver disease
EA027929B1 (en) 2012-05-25 2017-09-29 Янссен Сайенсиз Айрлэнд Юси Uracyl spirooxetane nucleosides
EP2900682A1 (en) 2012-09-27 2015-08-05 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Esters and malonates of sate prodrugs
US10513534B2 (en) 2012-10-08 2019-12-24 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′-chloro nucleoside analogs for HCV infection
EP2909223B1 (en) 2012-10-19 2017-03-22 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC Dinucleotide compounds for hcv infection
US10723754B2 (en) 2012-10-22 2020-07-28 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′,4′-bridged nucleosides for HCV infection
US20140140951A1 (en) 2012-11-14 2014-05-22 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. D-Alanine Ester of Rp-Nucleoside Analog
EP2938624A1 (en) 2012-11-14 2015-11-04 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. D-alanine ester of sp-nucleoside analog
EP2935304A1 (en) 2012-12-19 2015-10-28 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4'-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
CN103936637B (en) * 2013-01-18 2016-04-06 北京大学 The preparation method of E-3,4-dihydroxyphenyl vinyl sulfoxide compounds and the application as nerve protection medicine thereof
WO2014137930A1 (en) 2013-03-04 2014-09-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Thiophosphate nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
EP2970358B1 (en) 2013-03-04 2021-06-30 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC 3'-deoxy nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
EP2970357A1 (en) 2013-03-13 2016-01-20 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of 2'-cyano, azido and amino nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
WO2014165542A1 (en) 2013-04-01 2014-10-09 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 2',4'-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
WO2014197578A1 (en) 2013-06-05 2014-12-11 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1',4'-thio nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
WO2015017713A1 (en) 2013-08-01 2015-02-05 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. D-amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of halogeno pyrimidine compounds for liver disease
PL3041854T3 (en) 2013-08-08 2020-06-29 The Scripps Research Institute A method for the site-specific enzymatic labelling of nucleic acids in vitro by incorporation of unnatural nucleotides
EP3046924A1 (en) 2013-09-20 2016-07-27 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Hepatitis c virus inhibitors
WO2015061683A1 (en) 2013-10-25 2015-04-30 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. D-amino acid phosphoramidate and d-alanine thiophosphoramidate pronucleotides of nucleoside compounds useful for the treatment of hcv
WO2015066370A1 (en) 2013-11-01 2015-05-07 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. D-alanine phosphoramidate pronucleotides of 2'-methyl 2'-fluoro guanosine nucleoside compounds for the treatment of hcv
WO2015081297A1 (en) 2013-11-27 2015-06-04 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 2'-dichloro and 2'-fluoro-2'-chloro nucleoside analogues for hcv infection
EP3083654A1 (en) 2013-12-18 2016-10-26 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC 4'-or nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
WO2015134561A1 (en) 2014-03-05 2015-09-11 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions comprising a 5,5-fused heteroarylene flaviviridae inhibitor and their use for treating or preventing flaviviridae infection
WO2015134560A1 (en) 2014-03-05 2015-09-11 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Solid forms of a flaviviridae virus inhibitor compound and salts thereof
EP3129493B1 (en) 2014-04-09 2021-07-07 The Scripps Research Institute Import of unnatural or modified nucleoside triphosphates into cells via nucleic acid triphosphate transporters
EP3131914B1 (en) 2014-04-16 2023-05-10 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC 3'-substituted methyl or alkynyl nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
WO2017106767A1 (en) 2015-12-18 2017-06-22 The Scripps Research Institute Production of unnatural nucleotides using a crispr/cas9 system
DK3475295T3 (en) 2016-06-24 2022-10-24 Scripps Research Inst Novel nucleoside triphosphate transporter and uses thereof
AU2018300069A1 (en) 2017-07-11 2020-02-27 Synthorx, Inc. Incorporation of unnatural nucleotides and methods thereof
CA3071013A1 (en) 2017-08-03 2019-02-07 Synthorx, Inc. Cytokine conjugates for the treatment of proliferative and infectious diseases
MX2020008772A (en) 2018-02-26 2020-10-01 Synthorx Inc Il-15 conjugates and uses thereof.
BR112021014415A2 (en) 2019-02-06 2021-09-21 Synthorx, Inc. IL-2 CONJUGATES AND METHODS OF USING THEM
WO2020252262A1 (en) 2019-06-14 2020-12-17 The Scripps Research Institute Reagents and methods for replication, transcription, and translation in semi-synthetic organisms

Citations (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3817982A (en) * 1971-12-29 1974-06-18 Syntex Inc 2{40 ,3{40 -unsaturated nucleosides and method of making
US4594339A (en) * 1982-04-06 1986-06-10 Sloan-Kettering Institute For Cancer Research Anti-herpes virus compositions containing 5-substituted 1-2'(deoxy-2-'-substituted-β-d-arabinofuranosyl)pyrimedene nucleosides
US4847366A (en) * 1986-08-05 1989-07-11 Daikin Industries Ltd. 5-fluorouridine derivative and preparation of the same
US4900828A (en) * 1988-05-12 1990-02-13 Hoffmann-Laroche Inc. Intermediate compounds and an improved procedure for the synthesis of 2',3'-dideoxycytidine
US4904770A (en) * 1988-03-24 1990-02-27 Bristol-Myers Company Production of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides
US4987224A (en) * 1988-08-02 1991-01-22 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Method of preparation of 2',3'-dideoxynucleosides
US5130421A (en) * 1988-03-24 1992-07-14 Bristol-Myers Company Production of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides
US5175267A (en) * 1990-03-02 1992-12-29 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Stereoselective glycosylation of hetercyclic bases
US5200514A (en) * 1990-01-19 1993-04-06 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Synthesis of 2'-deoxypyrimidine nucleosides
US5212298A (en) * 1989-08-16 1993-05-18 Monsanto Company Method for producing synthetic N-linked glycoconjugates
US5241294A (en) * 1991-03-13 1993-08-31 Gec Alsthom Sa Varistor and resistor device for the interrupting chamber of circuit breaker
US5264561A (en) * 1991-03-22 1993-11-23 Japan Tobacco Inc. Method of manufacturing 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides
US5384396A (en) * 1988-02-23 1995-01-24 The University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Process for the deoxygenation of nucleosides
US5455339A (en) * 1986-05-01 1995-10-03 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Method for the preparation of 2',3'-dideoxy and 2',3'-dideoxydide-hydro nucleosides
US5539099A (en) * 1993-11-15 1996-07-23 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for large-scale preparation of 2',3'-didehydro-2',3'-dideoxynucleosides
US5561120A (en) * 1993-05-25 1996-10-01 Yale University Method for treating HBV infections with L-2',3'-didehydro-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine
US5625057A (en) * 1991-06-19 1997-04-29 Ajinomoto Co., Inc. Process for preparing 2',3'-Dideoxy-2',3'-dehydronucleosides
US5703058A (en) * 1995-01-27 1997-12-30 Emory University Compositions containing 5-fluoro-2',3'-didehydro-2',3'-dideoxycytidine or a mono-, di-, or triphosphate thereof and a second antiviral agent

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
NL8901258A (en) 1989-05-19 1990-12-17 Stichting Rega V Z W New 5-halo-2'-3'-di:deoxy-cytidine derivs. - useful as anti-retro-viral agents, esp. for treating HIV infections
DD293498A5 (en) 1989-07-20 1991-09-05 Zi Fuer Molekularbiologie Der Adw,De METHOD FOR PRODUCING A MEDIUM FOR THE TREATMENT OR PROPHYLAXIS OF HEPATITE INFECTIONS IN HUMANS AND ANIMALS
ES2276515T3 (en) 1998-02-25 2007-06-16 Emory University 2'-FLUORONUCLEOSIDS.

Patent Citations (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3817982A (en) * 1971-12-29 1974-06-18 Syntex Inc 2{40 ,3{40 -unsaturated nucleosides and method of making
US4594339A (en) * 1982-04-06 1986-06-10 Sloan-Kettering Institute For Cancer Research Anti-herpes virus compositions containing 5-substituted 1-2'(deoxy-2-'-substituted-β-d-arabinofuranosyl)pyrimedene nucleosides
US5455339A (en) * 1986-05-01 1995-10-03 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Method for the preparation of 2',3'-dideoxy and 2',3'-dideoxydide-hydro nucleosides
US4847366A (en) * 1986-08-05 1989-07-11 Daikin Industries Ltd. 5-fluorouridine derivative and preparation of the same
US5384396A (en) * 1988-02-23 1995-01-24 The University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Process for the deoxygenation of nucleosides
US4904770A (en) * 1988-03-24 1990-02-27 Bristol-Myers Company Production of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides
US5130421A (en) * 1988-03-24 1992-07-14 Bristol-Myers Company Production of 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides
US4900828A (en) * 1988-05-12 1990-02-13 Hoffmann-Laroche Inc. Intermediate compounds and an improved procedure for the synthesis of 2',3'-dideoxycytidine
US4987224A (en) * 1988-08-02 1991-01-22 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Method of preparation of 2',3'-dideoxynucleosides
US5212298A (en) * 1989-08-16 1993-05-18 Monsanto Company Method for producing synthetic N-linked glycoconjugates
US5200514A (en) * 1990-01-19 1993-04-06 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Synthesis of 2'-deoxypyrimidine nucleosides
US5175267A (en) * 1990-03-02 1992-12-29 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Stereoselective glycosylation of hetercyclic bases
US5241294A (en) * 1991-03-13 1993-08-31 Gec Alsthom Sa Varistor and resistor device for the interrupting chamber of circuit breaker
US5264561A (en) * 1991-03-22 1993-11-23 Japan Tobacco Inc. Method of manufacturing 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'-didehydronucleosides
US5625057A (en) * 1991-06-19 1997-04-29 Ajinomoto Co., Inc. Process for preparing 2',3'-Dideoxy-2',3'-dehydronucleosides
US5561120A (en) * 1993-05-25 1996-10-01 Yale University Method for treating HBV infections with L-2',3'-didehydro-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine
US5539099A (en) * 1993-11-15 1996-07-23 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for large-scale preparation of 2',3'-didehydro-2',3'-dideoxynucleosides
US5703058A (en) * 1995-01-27 1997-12-30 Emory University Compositions containing 5-fluoro-2',3'-didehydro-2',3'-dideoxycytidine or a mono-, di-, or triphosphate thereof and a second antiviral agent
US5905070A (en) * 1995-01-27 1999-05-18 Emory University 5--Caboxamido or 5--fluoro!-- 2', 3'--unsaturated or 3'--modified!--pyrimidine nucleosides
US6232300B1 (en) * 1995-01-27 2001-05-15 Emory University Treatment of HIV by administration of β-D-2′, 3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxy-5-fluorocytidine (D4FC)

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2439836A1 (en) 2002-09-12
WO2002070533A3 (en) 2002-12-19
MXPA03007853A (en) 2004-05-24
JP2004527504A (en) 2004-09-09
WO2002070533A2 (en) 2002-09-12
BR0207746A (en) 2004-06-29
US6927291B2 (en) 2005-08-09
US20020198224A1 (en) 2002-12-26
NZ540956A (en) 2007-01-26
RU2003129164A (en) 2005-03-20
EP1363927A2 (en) 2003-11-26
IL157478A0 (en) 2004-03-28
KR20030092006A (en) 2003-12-03
CN1505635A (en) 2004-06-16
AU2002255654B2 (en) 2008-05-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6927291B2 (en) Method for the synthesis of 2′,3′-dideoxy-2′,3′-didehydronucleosides
AU2002255654A1 (en) Method for the synthesis of 2&#39;,3&#39;-dideoxy -2&#39;,3&#39;-didehydronucleosides
CA2623522C (en) Modified 4&#39;-nucleosides as antiviral agents
US7582748B2 (en) Methods of manufacture of 2′-deoxy-β-L-nucleosides
US6525191B1 (en) Conformationally constrained L-nucleosides
US7291726B2 (en) Process for the preparation of 2′-halo-β-L-arabinofuranosyl nucleosides
JP2003532643A (en) 3&#39;- or 2&#39;-hydroxymethyl-substituted nucleoside derivatives for treating hepatitis virus infection
JP2008507547A5 (en)
EP2155771A1 (en) Azido purine nucleosides for treatment of viral infections
CA2351049C (en) Process for recovery of the desired cis-1,3-oxathiolane nucleosides from their undesired trans-isomers
KR20070073958A (en) Difluoronucleosides and process for preparation thereof
AU2002303187A1 (en) Process for the preparation of 2&#39;-HALO-Beta-L-arabinofuranosyl nucleosides
US5144018A (en) 2&#39;,3&#39;-dideoxy-adenosine derivatives
MX2008004079A (en) Modified 4&#39;-nucleosides as antiviral agents

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION